礼敬彼世尊、阿拉汉、正自觉者
在《相应部》中· 《六处品》复注巴利
Namo tassa bhagavato arahato sammāsambuddhassa · Saṃyuttanikāye · Saḷāyatanavaggaṭīkā
1. 六处相应复注
484 段
六处相应巴利
1. Saḷāyatanasaṃyuttaṃ
《内无常经》的注释巴利
1. Ajjhattāniccasuttavaṇṇanā
1 能看,所以叫“眼”。智也是这样,因为它按照事物的真实样子了知所缘,就像在说明什么是平等、什么是不平等一样起作用,这就是它的意思。肉眼也是这样。因为它也能在看见色法时“看”,所以叫“眼”。只有诸佛才有的眼,叫“佛眼”。因为它不共通于其他有情,能如实辨明有情相续中的常见、断见,能如实辨明随顺智和如实智,也能如实辨明欲贪随眠等,所以它就是意乐随眠智和根上下智。较低的三道,按照在四圣谛法中所说的方式运作于法,所以叫“法眼”;同样,它们的果,则是以在各自对应的烦恼上止息、断除的方式运作,所以也叫“法眼”。因为它能周遍地在一切法上完成眼的作用,所以叫“一切眼”,也就是一切知智。因为它是依靠天住而获得的,就像诸天的天眼一样,所以叫“天眼”,这是神通的一种特殊能力。因为它是增长光明之后看见色法的,所以说“以光明遍满”。又因为经中说“诸比丘,我于先前未曾听闻的法中,生起了眼:这是苦圣谛”等等,所以把能确定四圣谛的智称为“慧眼”。这个慧眼,有人说就是“观智”,另一些人则说是“观、道、果、省察智”。巴利
1. Cakkhatīti cakkhu, ñāṇaṃ, yathāsabhāvato ārammaṇassa jānanena samavisamaṃ ācikkhantaṃ viya pavattatīti attho. Tathā maṃsacakkhu. Tampi hi rūpadassane cakkhatīti cakkhu. Buddhānaṃyeva cakkhūti buddhacakkhu, asādhāraṇato hi sattasantānesu sassatucchedadiṭṭhi anulomikañāṇayathābhūtañāṇānañceva kāmarāgānusayādīnañca yāthāvato vibhāvitañāṇaṃ āsayānusayañāṇaṃ indriyaparopariyattañāṇañca. Heṭṭhimā tayo maggā catusaccadhammesu vuttākārena pavattiyā dhamme cakkhūti dhammacakkhu, tathā tesaṃ phalāni taṃtaṃpaṭipakkhesu paṭippassaddhipahānavasena pavattanato. Samantato sabbadhammesu cakkhukiccasādhanato samantacakkhu, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dibbavihārasannissayena laddhabbato devānaṃ dibbacakkhu viyāti taṃ dibbacakkhu, abhiññāviseso. Ālokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā rūpadassanato ‘‘ālokapharaṇenā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccanti me, bhikkhave, pubbe ananussutesu dhammesu cakkhuṃ udapādī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 15) nayena āgatattā catusaccaparicchedakañāṇaṃ ‘‘paññācakkhū’’ti vuttaṃ. Tadidaṃ ‘‘vipassanāñāṇa’’nti vadanti, ‘‘vipassanāmaggaphalapaccavekkhaṇañāṇānī’’ti apare.
由作为缘的这些色法聚集而成,所以叫“资具”,即作为支撑的四大所生色法。与资具一起,就是“有资具的”。依靠大种而变得清净,所以叫“净色”。在眼窝中、在眼膜上,是指在两层眼膜上。“生起”这里指的是水界,说的就是作为生起基础的水界。这里说的是“十三种资具”。但在《殊胜义注》(法集论注596)里,连同形状一起说成“十四种资具”。那里说的“形状”,就是指色处本身,也就是呈现为圆形等形状的那个。之所以把它们分开来说,是因为在之前所说的那个肉团中,确实存在着这样的和不是这样的水界与色处。对于“生起”,当它与依止四界的要素一起被提及时,应当理解为它依止于其余三界。在“视野”中,是指面对面站着时影像显现的地方,也就是被称为眼的视觉活动所生起的那个圆形区域。“已安置”这个词,是为了显示眼净色具有许多聚的状态。因为它遍满七层眼膜而安住,对自己所依止的那些净色提供帮助,同时又被依止于这些净色的寿、颜色等所守护和围绕,并且得到能产生三续色法的时节、心、食的支持,它就这样安住着。“能见色”是指依止自己而生起的识,有能力看见色处。“广说”是指对这个眼以及耳等,从因、缘等方面,以及从特征等方面所作的详细解说。巴利
Paccayabhūtehi etehi abhisambharīyantīti sambhārā, upatthambhabhūtā catusamuṭṭhānikarūpā. Saha sambhārehīti sasambhāraṃ. Mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya pasīdatīti pasādo. Akkhikūpake akkhipaṭalehīti ubhohi akkhidalehi. Sambhavoti āpodhātumeva sambhavabhūtamāha. Idha ‘‘terasa sambhārā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhasāliniyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 596) pana saṇṭhānena saddhiṃ ‘‘cuddasa sambhārā’’ti āgataṃ. Tattha saṇṭhānanti vaṇṇāyatanameva parimaṇḍalādisaṇṭhānabhūtaṃ. Visuṃ vacanaṃ pana nesaṃ tathābhūtānaṃ atathābhūtānañca āpodhātuvaṇṇāyatanānaṃ yathāvutte maṃsapiṇḍe vijjamānattā. Sambhavassa catudhātunissitehi saha vuttassa dhātuttayanissitatā yojetabbā. Diṭṭhimaṇḍaleti abhimukhaṃ ṭhitānaṃ paṭibimbapaññāyanaṭṭhānabhūte cakkhusaññitāya diṭṭhiyā pavattiṭṭhānabhūte maṇḍale. Sanniviṭṭhanti etena cakkhupasādassa anekakalāpagatabhāvo dassito. Tathā hi so satta akkhipaṭalāni abhibyāpetvā vattati. Yasmā so satta akkhipaṭalāni byāpetvā ṭhitehi attano nissayabhūtehi katūpakāraṃ taṃnissiteheva āyuvaṇṇādīhi anupālitaparivāritaṃ tisantatirūpasamuṭṭhāpakehi utucittāhārehi upatthambhiyamānaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati. Rūpadassanasamatthanti attānaṃ nissāya pavattaviññāṇassa vasena rūpāyatanadassanasamatthaṃ. Vitthārakathāti tassa cakkhuno sotādīnañca hetupaccayādivasena ceva lakkhaṇādivasena ca vitthārakathā.
“思惟行心”是指作为观生起的依处、应当被观照的心。有些人说它是“已进入观行、属于唯作的心”,那只是他们自己的看法。因为这段开示是通过显示三相来激发观,目的是引导修行者证得阿罗汉果。巴利
Sammasanacāracittanti vipassanāya pavattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ vipassitabbaṃ cittaṃ. Keci ‘‘vipassanupagatakiriyamayacitta’’nti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ. Tīṇi lakkhaṇāni dassetvā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpetvā arahattassa pāpanavasena desanāya pavattattā.
2-3. 《内苦经》等经的注释巴利
2-3. Ajjhattadukkhasuttādivaṇṇanā
2-3 二相:就是苦相和无我相。一相:就是无我相。其余的:就是前面所说的其余诸相。以此:就是凭借宣说第二经和第三经的那些方式。善区分:就是正确地确定。以此量:就是以讲述两种相或只讲一种相的方式。巴利
2-3.Dvelakkhaṇānīti dukkhānattalakkhaṇāni. Ekaṃ lakkhaṇanti anattalakkhaṇaṃ. Sesānīti vuttāvasesāni lakkhaṇāni. Tehīti yehi dutiyatatiyāni suttāni desitāni, tehi. Sallakkhitānīti sammadeva upadhāritāni. Ettakenāti dvinnaṃ ekasseva vā lakkhaṇassa kathanena.
4-6.《外无常经》等注释巴利
4-6. Bāhirāniccasuttādivaṇṇanā
4-6 就像前面“二相”等所说的那样,是相似的。理趣,指的是类推的理趣。巴利
4-6.Vuttasadisovāti ‘‘dve lakkhaṇānī’’tiādinā vuttasadiso eva. Nayoti atidesanayo.
7-12. 《内无常过去未来经》等经的注释巴利
7-12. Ajjhattāniccātītānāgatasuttādivaṇṇanā
7-12 辨别之后:因为过去和未来的法不存在,而执取却很坚固,所以要辨别。至于现在的法,因为它们是存在的,所以要以强烈的渴爱等执取,为了那些在这观行道中努力挣扎、堪受调伏的有情而说。巴利
7-12.Sallakkhetvāti atītānāgatānaṃ avijjamānattā gāhassa daḷhatāya sallakkhetvā. Paccuppannesu vijjamānattā balavatā taṇhādigāhena vipassanāvīthiṃ paṭipādetuṃ kilamantānaṃ vineyyānaṃ vasena.
1-4. 第一前正觉经等的注释巴利
1-4. Paṭhamapubbesambodhasuttādivaṇṇanā
13-16 13-16. 在这两部经里,都是按“处”来开示的,法味是同一个,所以把第一经和第二经合在一起,标出“在第一、第二经中”这个短语。所谓“我”,就是“我慢被安置在这里”;也就是“有身”。向于我而向内,因为属于它的范畴,所以存在于那里的就是“内法”,即那些内法的。而“内”又分四种:内内、自己的内、行境的内、对象的内。其中,存在于内中者称为内法,所以说“依内内之义,说它们为内法”;这些眼等即使在内法中也是内法性,因为是过度爱着之处,故说“由于欲贪的过度强烈”。现在为了连同对偶以举例的方式显示该义,故说“对人来说”等。这是显然易懂的。“外”是指从内之外所存在的一切。巴利
13-16. Dvīsupi suttesu āyatanānaṃ vasena desanā ekarasāvāti ‘‘paṭhamadutiyesū’’ti ekajjhaṃ paduddhāro kato. Āhito ahaṃmāno etthāti attā, attabhāvo. Attānamadhi ajjhattaṃ, tappariyāpannattā tattha bhavāni ajjhattikāni, tesaṃ ajjhattikānaṃ. Ajjhattañca nāma ajjhattajjhattaṃ , niyakajjhattaṃ, gocarajjhattaṃ, visayajjhattanti catubbidhaṃ. Tattha ajjhattajjhattaṃ ajjhatte bhavanti ajjhattikanti āha ‘‘ajjhattajjhattavasena ajjhattikāna’’nti. Tesaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ ajjhattesupi ajjhattikabhāvo adhikasinehavatthutāyāti āha ‘‘chandarāgassa adhimattabalavatāyā’’ti. Idāni tattha tamatthaṃ paṭiyoginā saddhiṃ udāharaṇavasena dassento ‘‘manussānaṃ hī’’tiādimāha. Taṃ uttānameva. Bāhirānīti ajjhattikato bahi bhavāni.
第5-6篇 《第一无味经》等的注释巴利
5-6. Paṭhamanoceassādasuttādivaṇṇanā
17-18 17-18.“已出离”是指从世间出离。“已离系”是指因为已经断除了作为结缚之因的烦恼,所以不再被系缚。“不倾向”是指不发起勤励。“无边际……以心”是指由于远离了烦恼轮回的边际,以无边际之心。因为已经宣说了眼等的乐味等,所以实际上就是在宣说四圣谛。巴利
17-18.Nikkhantāti lokato nikkhantā. Visaṃyuttā saṃyogahetūnaṃ kilesānaṃ pahīnattā no saṃyuttā. No adhimuttāti na ussukkajātā. Vimariyādī…pe… cetasāti vigatakilesavaṭṭamariyādatāya nimmariyādīkatena cittena. Catusaccameva kathitaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ assādādino kathitattā.
7-10. 《第一欢喜经》等经的注释巴利
7-10. Paṭhamābhinandasuttādivaṇṇanā
19-22 19-22. 因为开示是依欢喜的生起与灭去而展开的,所以这里说的正是轮回与还灭。“次第解说”是指从开头开始逐句解释词义。“这些”是指那些经。巴利
19-22.Vaṭṭavivaṭṭameva kathitaṃ abhinandanānaṃ uppādanirodhānañca vasena desanāya pavattattā. Anupubbakathāti ādito paṭṭhāya padatthavaṇṇanā. Nesanti suttānaṃ.
《一切经》的注释巴利
1. Sabbasuttavaṇṇanā
23 “一切”这个词,在某些地方也用于有限定的范围,这是依论典的用法而说的。为了排除这种用法,就用表示无余之境的“一切”来限定,所以说“一切的一切”。意思是:本身就是全部,所以叫一切。作为处的一切,就是“处一切”;剩下两种也同样是这个道理。巴利
23. Sabba-saddo pakaraṇavasena katthaci sappadesepi pavattatīti tato nivattanatthaṃ anavasesavisayena sabba-saddena visesetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbasabba’’nti, sabbameva hutvā sabbanti attho. Āyatanabhāvaṃ sabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ, sesadvayepi eseva nayo.
因为他的境界之外根本不存在任何东西,所以不存在什么“没被看见的”。这里的“于此”只是个虚词,也可以理解为“在这个包括天神在内的世间”。意思是:用那作为“见”的智慧来看,根本没有任何所谓“没被看见”的东西。如果是这样,那推论所知道的范围又怎么说呢?所以接着说“以及没被识知的”。对别人来说,即使不是直接经验到的,也还有没被识知的东西;但对佛陀来说,根本没有任何没被识知的东西,所以没被看见的、没被识知的都不存在。现在和过去可知的对象已经涵盖了,那未来又怎么说呢?所以说“不可了知的”,把这句话引过来,意思是:对他而言,没有任何不可了知的东西。为了说明对他而言没有什么是不可能知道、不可能了知的,于是说“他遍知了一切”等等。巴利
Tassa avisayābhāvato na addiṭṭhamidhatthi kiñcīti. Idhāti nipātamattaṃ, idha vā sadevake loke, dassanabhūtena ñāṇena adiṭṭhaṃ nāma kiñci natthīti attho. Yadi evaṃ anumānavisayaṃ nu kho kathanti āha ‘‘atho aviññāta’’nti. Aññesaṃ apaccakkhampi aviññātaṃ tassa kiñci natthīti adiṭṭhaṃ aviññātaṃ natthi. Paccuppannaṃ atītameva ñeyyaṃ gahitaṃ, anāgataṃ nu kho kathanti āha – ‘‘ajānitabba’’nti, tassa kiñci natthīti ānetvā sambandho. Jānituṃ ñātuṃ asakkuṇeyyaṃ nāma tassa kiñci natthīti dassento āha ‘‘sabbaṃ abhiññāsī’’tiādi.
因为完整地执取了整个有身法,所以叫“有身一切”。说到“在一切法中”,是指在作为五门所缘的一切法当中。由于在执取六种所缘时,并不成为“局部一切”,因此说“仅仅是五所缘”。“局部一切”达不到“有身一切”,因为它没有把三地法中的一部分包含进去。“有身一切”达不到“处一切”,因为它没有把出世间法包含进去。“处一切”达不到“一切之一切”。因为“处一切”只包含了四地法,并不包含特相和施设;而显示“一切之一切”时,显示的是佛陀智慧的境界。所以在这里说“‘一切之一切’达不到……”时,也是依所知和所缘来问答的,就像问“为什么?……因为没有……”那样。论师们说:“即使在‘处一切’当中,这里也只应取那些适合观的法,因为在‘应遍知’的解说法中,所希望的也只是思惟行的范围。”巴利
Sakalassa sakkāyadhammassa pariggahitattā sakkāyasabbaṃ. Sabbadhammesūti pañcannaṃ dvārānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtesu sabbesu dhammesu. Yasmā chasupi ārammaṇesu gahitesu padesasabbaṃ nāma na hoti, tasmā ‘‘pañcārammaṇamatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Padesasabbaṃ sakkāyasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti tassa tebhūmakadhammesu ekadesassa asaṅgaṇhanato. Sakkāyasabbaṃ āyatanasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti lokuttaradhammānaṃ asaṅgaṇhanato. Āyatanasabbaṃ sabbasabbaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Yasmā āyatanasabbena catubhūmakadhammāva pariggahitā, na lakkhaṇapaññattiyo, yasmā sabbasabbaṃ dassentena buddhañāṇavisayo dassito, tasmā ‘‘sabbasabbaṃ na pāpuṇātī’’ti etthāpi ‘‘kasmā…pe… natthitāyā’’ti sabbaṃ ñātārammaṇeneva pucchāvissajjanaṃ kataṃ. ‘‘Āyatanasabbepi idha vipassanupagadhammāva gahetabbā abhiññeyyaniddesavasenapi sammasanacārasseva icchitattā’’ti vadanti.
“遮止之后”是指:像这样“这一切都不存在”,就这样加以否定。对于那个说“我要安立另一个一切”的人,所谓“仅是言说对象而已”,意思是:就像说“石女之子”“虚空之花”那样,这个人的话仅仅只有一个可说的对象,并没有实际意义,只是空话而已。“超越之后”是指:不触及、不执取。那么“这是什么原因?”是问:造成恼怒的原因是什么?“正如在非境中那样”,意思是:就像其他任何人在自己能力范围之外努力一样。不过在义注中,为了用譬喻的方式显示经文“这是什么原因”所说的那个原因,才说了“正如”等话。而原因的譬喻本身也就是原因,所以应当理解为:“‘正如’是表示原因的词。”正因如此,才说“就像这样,在这里也是于非境中……”等等。巴利
Paṭikkhipitvāti ‘‘idaṃ sabbaṃ nāma na hotī’’ti evaṃ paṭikkhipitvā. Tassāti ‘‘aññaṃ sabbaṃ paññāpessāmī’’ti vadantassa. Vācāya vattabbavatthumattakamevāti vañjhāputtagaganakusumādivācā viya etassa vācāya kevalaṃ vattabbavatthukameva bhaveyya, na attho, vacanamattakamevāti attho . Atikkamitvāti anāmasitvā aggahetvā. Taṃ kissa hetūti vighātāpajjanaṃ kena hetunā. Yathā taṃ avisayasminti yathā aññopi koci avisaye vāyamanto, evanti attho. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana yasmā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’ti vuttakāraṇameva upanayanavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā ta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Kāraṇopanayanañca kāraṇamevāti ‘‘yathāti kāraṇavacana’’nti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘evaṃ imasmimpi avisaye’’tiādi.
2. 《舍断经》的注释巴利
2. Pahānasuttavaṇṇanā
24 24. “对一切”是指连同门与所缘一起、在门中生起的一切。“为了断除”是指以断除与它相系的欲贪来断除。“眼触”是指依于眼的触。“作为根本缘”是指把它当作根本的缘来做;当眼触作为俱生受的缘时,这本身就已经说完了,不需要再多说什么。“以此类推”是通过这样的说法,表示接下来应当说“以耳触为根本缘”等等。“意”是指有分心,因为这里指的是意门。“所缘”是指法所缘。“伴随转向的速行”是指与意门转向一同生起的速行。由于在眼门等一切门中,前面所说的那些意识触和受都以它为先行,而成为根本缘;随顺这个道理,所以说“与有分俱生的触”。与转向俱起的受和速行的受,就是所说的“感受”。至于取与有分相应的受,这里则没有什么需要说明的。不应离开有分,应当把连同有分心一起取的转向理解为意门转向,也就是有分。这里所说的教法,是指“为了断除”等所展开的教导,是世尊的指示、命令。这叫做施设,因为它按各种方式让人了解各种意义。在这里,通过“一切”这个统摄词,一切自性法都被统摄了。那么施设是什么?为了通过考察来显示它,才说了“这里所说的”等话,应当这样理解。巴利
24.Sabbassāti dvārārammaṇehi saddhiṃ dvārappavattassa. Pahānāyāti tappaṭibaddhachandarāgapahānavasena pajahanāya. Cakkhusamphassanti cakkhusannissitaphassaṃ. Mūlapaccayanti mūlabhūtaṃ paccayaṃ katvā, sahajātavedanāya cakkhusamphassapaccayabhāve vattabbameva natthi. Eseva nayoti apadesena ‘‘sotasamphassaṃ mūlapaccayaṃ katvā’’tiādinā vattabbanti dasseti. Manoti bhavaṅgacittaṃ manodvārassa adhippetattā. Ārammaṇanti dhammārammaṇaṃ. Sahāvajjanakajavananti sahamanodvārāvajjanakaṃ javanaṃ. Taṃpubbakattā manoviññāṇaphassavedanānaṃ mūlapaccayabhūtā sabbesveva cakkhudvārādīsu vuttittā tadanurūpato ‘‘bhavaṅgasahajāto samphasso’’ti vuttaṃ. Sahāvajjanavedanāya javanavedanā ‘‘vedayita’’nti adhippetā, bhavaṅgasampayuttāya pana vedanāya gahaṇe vattabbameva natthi. Bhavaṅgato amocetvā bhavaṅgacittena saddhiṃyeva āvajjanaṃ gahetvā manodvārāvajjanaṃ bhavaṅgaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yā panettha desanāti yā ettha ‘‘pahānāyā’’tiādinā pavattadesanā satthu anasiṭṭhi āṇā. Ayaṃ paṇṇatti nāma tassa tassa atthassa pakārato ñāpanato. Ettha sabbaggahaṇena sabbe sabhāvadhammā gahitā, paññatti pana katamāti vicāraṇāya taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yā panetthā’’tiādi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
3. 《证智遍知舍断经》的注释巴利
3. Abhiññāpariññāpahānasuttavaṇṇanā
25 25. “证知”(abhiññāti)就是通过证知。这里省略了字母ya,就像“亲自证知”(sayaṃ abhiññā)等用法一样(《长部》1.28, 405;《中部》1.154),同样,“遍知”(pariññāti)这个词也是这样。“一切”(sabbanti)指十二处的全部,因为这一切都应该被证知。“证知之后”(abhijānitvāti)就是通过证知而了知。“遍知之后”(parijānitvāti)就是以审察遍知,从无常等角度彻底了知。“为了舍断”(pajahanatthāyāti)就是以舍断遍知,毫无剩余地舍断。巴利
25.Abhiññāti abhiññāya. Ya-kāralopavasenāyaṃ niddeso ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.28, 405; ma. ni. 1.154) viya, tathā ‘‘pariññā’’ti etthāpi. Sabbanti āyatanasabbaṃ. Tañhi abhiññeyyaṃ. Abhijānitvāti abhiññāya jānitvā. Parijānitvāti tīraṇapariññāya aniccādito parijānitvā. Pajahanatthāyāti pahānapariññāya anavasesato pajahanāya.
第4篇 第一不遍知经的注释巴利
4. Paṭhamaaparijānanasuttavaṇṇanā
26 26. 在这里,世尊从“自证”等语开始,先显示黑分,再显示白分,这是为了随顺所化众生的意乐。因此,这里既讲了流转,也讲了还灭。巴利
26. ‘‘Abhijāna’’ntiādinā ettha bhagavā paṭhamaṃ kaṇhapakkhaṃ dassetvā sukkapakkhaṃ dasseti veneyyajjhāsayavasena. Tenettha vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.
第五,第二不遍知经的注释巴利
5. Dutiyaaparijānanasuttavaṇṇanā
27 27. 所谓“眼识所识知的法”,就只是色处本身,所以说“就是下面已经取到的色”。在这里,因为说的是“眼识所识知的诸法”,所以没有出现在眼前的也包括在内。下面则无论出现在眼前还是没出现在眼前,都一概取到了,因为毫无遗漏地说“凡那些色”。那些受、想、行蕴,是和眼识一起被识知的。实际上,眼识与它们同生、同依处、同灭,而且缘取同一个所缘。在其余的句子里,也就是在“以及耳和诸声”等所说的黑分五处和白分六处中,道理也是这样。这个道理就是:前面解释“取下面已经取到的色”的那个义理,在那里也是同样的解释方式。巴利
27. Cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbadhammo nāma rūpāyatanamevāti āha ‘‘heṭṭhā gahitarūpamevā’’ti. Idha anāpāthagataṃ ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇaviññātabbā dhammā’’ti vuttattā. Heṭṭhā āpāthagatampi anāpāthagatampi gahitameva ‘‘ye ca rūpā’’ti anavasesato vuttattā. Te hi vedanāsaññāsaṅkhārakkhandhā saha cakkhuviññāṇena viññātabbattā. Tathā hi cakkhuviññāṇaṃ tehi ekuppādaṃ ekavatthukaṃ ekanirodhaṃ ekārammaṇameva. Sesapadesūti sesesu ‘‘yañca sotaṃ ye ca saddā’’tiādinā āgatesu kaṇhapakkhe pañcasu, sukkapakkhe chasupi padesu. Eseva nayoti yvāyaṃ ‘‘heṭṭhā gahitarūpameva gaṇhitvā’’ti attho vutto. Eso eva tatthapi atthavaṇṇanānayo.
6. 《燃烧经》的注释巴利
6. Ādittasuttavaṇṇanā
28 在伽耶河不远处,有一个叫伽耶的村子。“住在伽耶”这句话,是处格用来表示附近的地方。因为世尊当时其实住在伽耶村附近一个叫伽耶头的石背上,所以经文说“世尊住在那里”。巴利
28. Gayānāmikāya nadiyā avidūre pavatto gāmo gayā nāma, tassaṃ gayāyaṃ viharatīti samīpatthe cetaṃ bhummavacanaṃ. Gayāgāmassa hi āsanne gayāsīsanāmake piṭṭhipāsāṇe bhagavā tadā vihāsi. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavā tattha viharatī’’ti.
其中,“对比丘们说”是指世尊所招呼的那些比丘,也说明这一开示怎样才适合他们。在这两种应当阐明的事理当中,这是从起源开始、按顺序展开的渐次解说。“从此”是指从这个劫以来。“据说”是表示传闻的语气词。通过修习波罗蜜而达到成熟圆满。“智”指觉悟之智。幼子是世尊的异母弟弟。外围用竹墙小屋围起来,里面则张设布幕。巴利
Tatrāti ‘‘bhikkhū āmantesī’’ti ye bhikkhū āmantesi, yathā cāyaṃ desanā tesaṃ sappāyā jātā, tatra tasmiṃ atthadvaye vibhāvetabbe ayaṃ anupubbikathā samudāgamato paṭṭhāya anupaṭipāṭikathā. Itoti imasmā kappato. Kirāti anussavanatthe nipāto. Pāramitāparibhāvanāya paripākagate. Ñāṇeti bodhiñāṇe. Kaniṭṭhaputto vemātikabhātā bhagavato. Veḷubhittikuṭikāhi parikkhipitvā bahiddhā, anto pana paṭasāṇīhi.
把福德之思植入一切众生的内在深处。世尊也被当作他的儿子,所以说“另外三个儿子”。“没有离散”是指没有因败亡而溃散、没有逃走。“遮止了”是指“我没办法给”,于是就那样做了。“因真实语而获得”是指他们凭王族的真实语,为自己求得了恩赐。巴利
Sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ. Puññacetanaṃ anto abbhantare paveseti. Bhagavāpi tassa puttoti katvā ‘‘aññe tayo puttā’’ti vuttaṃ. Avippakiritvāti parājayena avippakiriya apalāyitvā. Pidahīti dātuṃ na sakkomīti tathā akāsi. Saccavāditāya gaṇhiṃsūti rājakulassa saccavāditāya attano varaṃ gaṇhiṃsu.
“退回去”是指从承诺中退缩。“在中间”是指你们所定的期限还没到,就死在半路上了。二十八肘长的距离叫作“一牛吼地”。“在一牛吼地”就是在二十八肘那么大的地方。“致力于施堂”就是专心投入布施这件事。巴利
Vinivattitunti paṭiññāya nivattituṃ. Antarāti tumhehi paricchinnakālassa antarā eva matā. Aṭṭhavīsatihatthaṭṭhānaṃ usabhaṃ nāma. Usabhe aṭṭhavīsatihatthappamāṇe ṭhāne. Dānagge byāvaṭoti pasuto.
“他”指的就是世尊。诸佛说法示现神通,本来就是这样的:通过说法所把握的义理,会像亲眼所见一样清清楚楚地呈现在眼前。所以他说:“我将为他们……开示。”
“决断”的意思是:对那些长久以来反复接触、已被燃烧之火熏染的人,只有以“燃烧”为线索的说法才合适,他对此下定了决心。
“被点燃”是指被十一种火点燃,烧成一片火焰。所以经文说“充分燃烧”。
“苦相已被说明”是指:通过说明眼等诸处被十一种火燃烧,因为其本质是苦,所以说为苦,由此说明了苦相。巴利
Soti bhagavā. Tathārūpañhi buddhānaṃ desanāpāṭihāriyaṃ, yathā desanāya gahito attho paccakkhato vibhūto hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Tenāha ‘‘imesaṃ…pe… desessāmī’’ti. Sanniṭṭhānanti cirakālaparicitādittaaggikānaṃ ādittapariyāyadesanāva sappāyāti nicchayamakāsi. Padittanti padīpitaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi ekajālībhūtaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sampajjalita’’nti. Dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ ekādasahi aggīhi ādittabhāvena dukkhamatāya dukkhassa kathitattā.
第7章《半人经》的注释巴利
7. Addhabhūtasuttavaṇṇanā
29 29. 因为“adhi”这个词和“addha”这个词意思相同,所以他说“addhabhūta就是adhibhūta”等等。其余部分按照前面所说的方式理解即可。巴利
29. Adhisaddena samānattho addhasaddoti āha ‘‘addhabhūtanti adhibhūta’’ntiādi. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
第8篇 适合根除经的注释巴利
8. Samugghātasāruppasuttavaṇṇanā
30 所谓“被设想的东西”,就是指会被渴爱、慢和见抓住的设想。“对一切被设想的东西”就是对所有被设想的东西,把它彻底铲除、断掉它的桥,能带来这种效果的,就是“适合彻底铲除一切被设想的东西”。不过,注释书里还说了第二种思路:“被设想的东西,只在眼等处生起,不在别处。”“随顺”就是适合、不违背。“在这里”就是只在这个教法里,因为在别处没有这个东西。为了说明前面说的“渴爱、慢、见这三种设想”如何在自他相续中以对立的方式配合,所以说了“眼是我”等话。其中,“眼是我”显示了以内在为所缘的“见设想”,因为它表明了执取自我的我见。“我的”则显示了“渴爱设想”或“慢设想”,因为通过执取的方式,从“更好”等想法也会生起慢。剩下两个词也应按这个道理理解设想的分类。“我”就是自我本身,而它依眼而说,因为它的活动依赖于眼,所以不会把“他”设想成那样。“我的”是一种系缚障碍,因为只有在眼存在时才能得到它,眼不存在时就不会那样设想,因为对那样设想的人来说,所依的缘已经毁坏。剩下两组也应同样理解。巴利
30. Maññitaṃ nāma taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīhi gahetabbaṃ maññitaṃ. Sabbasmiṃ maññitanti sabbamaññitaṃ, tassa samugghāto setughāto, tadāvahaṃ sabbamaññitasamugghātasāruppaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘maññitaṃ nāma cakkhādīsu eva uppajjati, nāññasmi’’nti dutiyanayo vutto. Anucchavikanti anurūpaṃ avilomaṃ. Idhāti idheva sāsane aññattha tadabhāvato. ‘‘Taṇhā-mānadiṭṭhimaññitāna’’nti vuttaṃ maññitattayaṃ saparasantānesu paṭipakkhavasena yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhuṃ ahanti vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘cakkhuṃ aha’’nti iminā ajjhattavisayaṃ diṭṭhimaññitañca dasseti attābhinivesāhaṃkāradīpanato. ‘‘Mama’’nti iminā taṇhāmaññitaṃ mānamaññitampi vā, pariggahamukhenapi seyyādito mānuppajjanato. Sesapadadvayepi iminā nayena maññitavibhāgo veditabbo. Ahanti attāva, so ca cakkhusmiṃ tadadhīnavuttittā ‘‘paro’’ti na maññati. Mama kiñcanapalibodho cakkhusmiṃ sati labbhanato, asati na maññati tathāmaññitassa paccayaghātato. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo.
我从眼而来:这个被称为“我”的众生,是从眼而来的,因为在那里它以一种极微细的方式被感知到。我的这种系缚障碍,是从眼而来的,因为只有眼存在时,它才被感知到。其余二者也是同样的道理。其中,“他”是指别的众生。他不会认为“这是我的眼”,因为对于拥有那只眼的人来说,根本不存在一个可以被称为“我”的东西。“我所性”就是产生“我的”的原因。其余内容容易理解。这样一来,在这部经中,按照眼、色、眼识、眼触,以及乐、苦、不苦不乐受,在眼门有七轮;耳门等也是如此,所以共有六组七轮,即四十二。又按照有身,以“于一切不计度”等语句来说,所以成为四十三。再取三界之轮为“世间”,而说“于世间不执取任何物”,所以成为四十四。应当知道,在所有这些四十四处中,正是为了证得阿拉汉果而开示了观。有些抄本写成“四十四以上之百数”,那只是笔误。巴利
Ahaṃ cakkhuto niggatoti ‘‘aha’’nti vattabbo ayaṃ satto cakkhuto niggato tattha sukhumākārena upalabbhanato. Mama kiñcanapalibodho cakkhuto niggato tasmiṃ sati eva upalabbhanato . Sesadvayepi eseva nayo. Tattha paroti paro satto. Mama cakkhūti na maññati yassa taṃ cakkhu, tassa ‘‘aha’’nti vattabbasseva abhāvato. Mamattabhūtanti mama kāraṇaṃ. Sesaṃ uttānameva. Evametasmiṃ sutte cakkhurūpa-cakkhuviññāṇa-cakkhusamphassa-sukhadukkhādukkhamasukhavasena satta vārā cakkhudvāre, tathā sotadvārādīsūti cha sattakā dvecattālīsa. Puna sakkāyavasena ‘‘sabbaṃ na maññatī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ, tena tecattālīsa. Puna tebhūmakavaṭṭaṃ ‘‘loko’’ti gahetvā ‘‘na kiñci loke upādiyatī’’ti vuttaṃ, tena catucattālīsa honti. Evaṃ sabbathāpi catucattālīsāya ṭhānesu arahattaṃ pāpetvā vipassanā kathitāti veditabbā. ‘‘Catucattālīsādhikasatesū’’ti kesuci potthakesu likhanti, sā ca pamādalekhā.
9. 第一根除适宜经的注释巴利
9. Paṭhamasamugghātasappāyasuttavaṇṇanā
31 成为助伴,是因为它能带来那个。从彼,是从计度的形态来说。那,指计度的所依。以不同行相,意思是:就像他执取无常等行相时,它却以另一种无常等行相生起。变异、变坏:由生灭而成为变异,由老和死而成为两种变坏。趋入于它,就成为变异者;即使已经这样,在具有衰坏、破裂性质的存在中,众生仍然欢喜存在。把下面所取的收摄起来,就是以不计度眼等,把下面所取的蕴、界、处,按蕴等理路一并收摄,再次显示计度的所依。最后连同从彼而有彼这一句,在每一轮中都是八个一组,所以说于四十八处。巴利
31.Upakārabhūtā tadāvahattā. Tatoti maññitākārato. Tanti maññanāvatthuṃ. Aññenākārenāti yathā maññati aniccādiākārato, aññena aniccādinā ākārena hoti. Aññathābhāvaṃ vipariṇāmanti uppādavayatāya aññathābhāvaṃ jarāya maraṇena ca dvedhā vipariṇāmetabbaṃ. Taṃ upagamanena aññathābhāvī, evaṃbhūto hutvāpi jīraṇabhijjanasabhāvesu. Bhavesu satto loko uparipi bhavaṃyeva abhinandati. Heṭṭhā gahitameva saṅkaḍḍhitvāti ‘‘cakkhuṃ na maññatī’’tiādinā heṭṭhā gahitameva khandhadhātuāyatanāti khandhādipariyāyena ekato gahetvā punapi maññanāvatthuṃ dasseti. Avasāne ‘‘tato taṃ hotī’’ti vuttapadena saddhiṃ sabbavāresu aṭṭha aṭṭha hontīti ‘‘aṭṭhacattālīsāya ṭhānesū’’ti vuttaṃ.
《第二断除适宜经》注释巴利
10. Dutiyasamugghātasappāyasuttavaṇṇanā
32 “开示之后”这句话里,tvā 这个后缀在这里表示特征,或者表示原因。因为佛陀的三转开示,其标志就是无始以来众生相续中存在的三种执取,而这三转开示以那三种执取为所缘,它生起的目的就只是为了断除它们。注释书里说“为了证得阿罗汉果而宣说了观”,意思是“观和四道一起被宣说了”。巴利
32.Dassetvāti ettha lakkhaṇe ayaṃ tvā-saddo, hetumhi vā. Anādisattasantānagatagāhattayalakkhitā hi satthu, tiparivaṭṭadesanā taṃnimittaṃ yāvadeva tappahānāya pavattitabhāvato. Arahattaṃ pāpetvā vipassanā kathitāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saha vipassanāya cattāropi maggā kathitā’’ti.
《有生法品》的注释巴利
4. Jātidhammavaggavaṇṇanā
33-42 生起的本质,就是依靠各种因缘而生的本质。生起之后紧接着就成熟,所以是衰老的本质。眼等这些地方,就以不同种类生起的特征作为疾病产生的条件,因此是病的本质。死亡的本质上就是坏灭的本质。忧愁的本质,是因为亲属衰败等而被忧苦之火燃烧的痛苦本质。杂染的本质,是因为渴爱等而使心被染污的本质。巴利
33-42.Nibbattanasabhāvanti hetupaccayehi uppajjanasabhāvaṃ. Uppādānantaraṃ buddhippattiyā jīraṇasabhāvaṃ. Yattha cakkhādayo, tattheva visabhāgasamuṭṭhānalakkhaṇena byādhino uppattipaccayabhāvena byādhisabhāvaṃ. Maraṇasabhāvanti vināsasabhāvaṃ. Sokasabhāvanti ñātibyasanādinā ḍayhamānadukkhasabhāvaṃ. Saṃkilesikasabhāvanti taṇhādivasena saṃkilissanasabhāvaṃ.
第5章《一切无常品》的注释巴利
5. Sabbaaniccavaggavaṇṇanā
43-52 43-52. 知遍知之所以被提到,是因为它从所缘的角度阐明了以那个境界为对象的法。应当知道,其余两种——审察遍知和舍断遍知——也同样被提到了,因为它们以应当证知的法为所缘,而且审察遍知和舍断遍知能够从智当中生起。在“应当遍知”这句话里,只提到了审察遍知;在“应当舍断”这句话里,只提到了舍断遍知——这就是文句之间的关联。其实另外两种也已经被包含在内了,因为离开它们,义理就无法成立。“应当被现证”是指通过从所缘上不迷惑地通达而现证。即使没有明确说出来,它们也已经被包含在内了,因为遍知的最终目的就是舍断。以同一本质而分离,就是“种种义”。像被逼近的疾病所侵袭一样,内在的一切都被击碎,就是“被损害的义”。巴利
43-52.Ñātapariññā āgatā visayavasena tabbisayassa dhammassa jotitattā. Itarā dve tīraṇapahānapariññāpi āgatā evāti veditabbā, tāsaṃ abhiññeyyadhammavisayattā ñāṇassa ca tīraṇapahānapariññāsambhavato. Pariññeyyapade tīraṇapariññāva āgatā, pahātabbapade pahānapariññāva āgatāti yojanā. Itarāpi dve gahitāyeva tāhi vinā atthasiddhiyā abhāvato. Paccakkhaṃ kātabbaṃ ārammaṇato asammohato paṭivijjhanena. Avuttāpi gahitāyeva parijānanassa yāvadeva pahānatthattā. Ekasabhāvena vinābhāvo anekaggaṭṭho. Upasaṭṭharogena viya anto eva abhihatasabbatā upahataṭṭho.
无明品注释巴利
6. Avijjāvaggavaṇṇanā
53-62 对四圣谛的无知,就是覆盖四圣谛的迷乱。因为它能认知不该被认知的,而对应该被认知的却不能认知,所以无明正是明的对立面。当明生起时,无明就被毫无剩余地断除。为了显示这一点,他说“明”就是指阿拉汉道的明。为了说明道的出起并不只是依靠无常随观,也依靠苦随观等其他随观,他说“依于苦……确实被断除”。所谓“在一切处”,是针对下文接下来的经文说的。在那之后,还有其他经文也按照同样的意义和特征作了说明。那些经文也是依照能够如此通达的人们的意乐而宣说的。巴利
53-62.Catūsu saccesu aññāṇaṃ tappaṭicchādakasammoho. Avindiyaṃ vindati, vindiyaṃ na vindatīti katvā vijjāya paṭipakkhova avijjā. Vijjāya uppannāya anavasesato avijjā pahīyati, taṃ dassento ‘‘vijjāti arahattamaggavijjā’’ti āha. Na kevalaṃ aniccānupassanāvaseneva maggavuṭṭhānaṃ, atha kho itarānupassanāvasenapīti dassento ‘‘dukkhā…pe… pahīyatiyevā’’ti āha. Sabbatthāti uparisuttante sandhāyāha. Tato aparepi taṃatthalakkhaṇavasena kathitasuttantepi. Tānipi hi tathā bujjhanakapuggalānamajjhāsayena vuttānīti.
第七 弥伽阇罗品巴利
7. Migajālavaggo
《第一弥伽阇罗经》的注释巴利
1. Paṭhamamigajālasuttavaṇṇanā
63 63. 眼识有看的功用,所以用所说的眼识应当看,因此说“成为可意所缘”。“可意”,就是应当被欲追求。“令心增长”,就是“悦意”,所以说“令心增长者”。具有令人喜爱的本质,就是“令人欢喜”。与欲相应,就是与欲相连。而这里所谓相应,正是执取所缘的意思,所以说“取为所缘”等。称为渴爱的喜,是渴爱之喜,并不像“喜行”等经文中那样只是满足的喜悦。“村边”,就是村落附近。说了“非近行处”之后,再用“在那里……”等来具体指出它。巴利
63. Cakkhuviññāṇaṃ dassanakiccanti vuttacakkhuviññāṇena passitabbanti āha ‘‘iṭṭhārammaṇabhūtā’’ti. Kamanīyāti kāmetabbā. Manaṃ appāyantīti manāpāti āha ‘‘manavaḍḍhanakā’’ti. Piyāyitabbasabhāvā piyarūpā. Kāmūpasaṃhitāti kāmapaṭisaṃyuttā. Ālambitabbatā eva cettha upasaṃhitatāti ‘‘ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’tiādimāha. Taṇhāsaṅkhātā nandī taṇhānandī, na tuṭṭhinandīyeva ‘‘nandiṃ caratī’’tiādīsu viya. Gāmantanti gāmasamīpaṃ. ‘‘Anupacāraṭṭhāna’’nti vatvā taṃ dasseti ‘‘yatthā’’tiādinā.
这里说的“在此处”,是针对前面引来的那段经文。之所以说“撇开这一种说法”,是因为那个意思已经被“远的”这个词包含进去了。在“微声、微音”当中,“微”这个词表示不存在、没有。巴利
Etthāti yathānīhate pāṭhe. ‘‘Imaṃ ekaṃ pariyāyaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti vuttaṃ tassa ‘‘pantānī’’tipadena saṅgahitattā. Appasaddāni appanigghosānīti ettha appa-saddo abhāvattho.
第六经 三弥提世间问经的注释巴利
6. Samiddhilokapañhāsuttavaṇṇanā
68 从《祈求经》开始,指的是在弥嘎加喇品中,从第二部经开始。而第一部经则讲述了以渴爱为伴侣而住等内容。巴利
68.Āyācanasuttato paṭṭhāyāti migajālavagge dutiyasuttato paṭṭhāya. Paṭhamasutte pana dutiyakavihārādibhāvo vuttoti.
7. 优波先那蛇经的注释巴利
7. Upasenaāsīvisasuttavaṇṇanā
69 握取:因为要松开披覆的衣服,为了仔细观察而解开。山洞之影:指前方山洞的阴影处。跌落:从山洞顶盖滑落下来。所触之毒:四种毒蛇当中,那个是触毒者。因此说“所以”等话。正在被遍取:就是正在耗尽、正在消灭的意思。依于界限:依照各自毒性的界限程度。异离:舍弃生长等本有状态。自性离去:就是消亡、坏灭。巴利
69.Gahetvāti pārupanassa sithilakaraṇena vīmaṃsato mocetvā. Leṇacchāyāyāti purimadisāya leṇacchāyāyaṃ. Patitvāti leṇacchadanato bhassitvā. Phuṭṭhavisoti catūsu āsīvisesu so phuṭṭhaviso. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Pariyādiyamānamevāti khepentameva, vināsentamevāti attho. Yathāparicchedenāti attano visaparicchedānurūpaṃ. Aññathābhāvanti vaḍḍhabhāvādipakatijahanaṃ. Sabhāvavigamoti vināso.
8. 《优波婆那现见经》的注疏巴利
8. Upavāṇasandiṭṭhikasuttavaṇṇanā
70 以色为所缘而清楚地识别,这是依通达遍知来说的。“色贪”,是指对青等各类色法生起的贪。“清楚地识别”,就是知道“我这份贪还没有断除”。这里说的是有学圣者的省察。因此说“优波婆那,法就是这样现见的”等等。清楚地识别色贪,就是清楚地知道“我内心对诸色没有贪”。这是无学圣者的省察。巴利
70.Rūpaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karoti ñātapariññāvasena. Rūparāganti nīlādibhede rūpadhamme rāgaṃ. Paṭisaṃviditaṃ karoti ‘‘ayaṃ me rāgo appahīno’’ti. Etena sekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā kathitā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘evampi kho, upavāṇa, sandiṭṭhiko dhammo hotī’’tiādi. Rūparāgaṃ paṭisaṃviditaṃ karoti ‘‘natthi me ajjhattaṃ rūpesu rāgo’’ti pajānāti. Asekkhānaṃ hāyaṃ paccavekkhaṇā.
《第一六触处经》的注疏巴利
9. Paṭhamachaphassāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
71 71. “触的来源”:指六种触的来源、生起之处,也就是眼等诸处。有人说“所谓‘我已消亡’”,意思是:谁能如实了知六触处的集起等,谁就是已住完成者;另一种人则是未住完成者,而我就是那样的人。“此即是”:就是在眼等处,通过“这不是我的”等方式,三种执取不存在。巴利
71.Phassākarānanti channaṃ phassānaṃ ākarānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānānaṃ, cakkhādīnanti attho. Naṭṭho nāma ahanti vadati, yo channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ samudayādiṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānāti, so vusitavā, itaro avusitavā ahañca tādisoti. Ayamevāti ayaṃ cakkhusmiṃ ‘‘netaṃ mamā’’tiādinā tiṇṇaṃ gāhānaṃ abhāvo eva.
《第二及触处经》的注疏巴利
10. Dutiyachaphassāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
72 “不再有来生”就是指不再受生。巴利
72.Apunabbhavoti punabbhavābhāvo.
第11章 对《第三六触处经》的注释巴利
11. Tatiyachaphassāyatanasuttavaṇṇanā
73 这里说“彻底消失”,意思是它确实已经彻底消失了,也就是从根本上就不存在了。巴利
73.Panassasanti ekaṃsena naṭṭhoti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘atinaṭṭho’’ti, dhurato eva naṭṭhoti attho.
第一病经等的注释巴利
1-5. Paṭhamagilānasuttādivaṇṇanā
74-78 “不知名”是指:无论从姓名、族姓来看,还是从戒律等功德来看,都不为人所知、没有名声。由于还没有达到长老或中位的身份,所以称为新学。巴利
74-78.Appaññātoti nāmagottato ceva sīlādiguṇehi ca appaññāto avissuto. Theramajjhimabhāvaṃ appattatāya navo.
第七 第二无明断经的注释巴利
7. Dutiyaavijjāpahānasuttavaṇṇanā
80 以无常等为出发点而坚持,就是执著;那同样的执著越过法的真实本性、向外抓取,就是执取;那同样的就是取。因为诸行本身就是无常等的性质,所以用那样的执著、执取、取去抓取是不恰当的。诸行正是流转的因,所以是行相。在诸行中,由于未遍知的执著而似乎能见到的“我”的样子,其实并不存在;另有一个无我的样子,所以是从那之外去看。“已遍知的执著”,就是经过审察遍知、限定之后,对已了知之事生起的错误坚持。或者,“已遍知”在这里是指“观”,也就是运用无色七法的观察来了知。巴利
80. Aniccādivasena abhinivisanaṃ abhiniveso, so eva dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanato parāmāso, so eva gāho. Tena abhinivesaparāmāsaggāhena gaṇhituṃ na yuttā aniccādisabhāvattā. Saṅkhārā eva pavattiyā kāraṇabhāvato saṅkhāranimittāni. Yo saṅkhāresu apariññātābhinivesena passitabbo attākāro, so na hotīti añño anattākāro, tato aññato passati. Pariññātābhinivesoti tīraṇapariññāya paricchijja ñātamicchābhiniveso. Pariññātābhinivesoti vā pariññātavipassanābhiniveso. Vipassanāti arūpasattakavasena vipassanāya parijānitabbā.
8. 《众多比丘经》的注释巴利
8. Sambahulabhikkhusuttavaṇṇanā
81 “唯”是指不与其他的相混杂。巴利
81.Kevalanti itaralakkhaṇehi avomissaṃ.
10. 颇求那问经的注释巴利
10. Phaggunapañhāsuttavaṇṇanā
83 83. 渴爱被断除时,邪见和慢也就同样被断除了,所以说“因为渴爱的戏论已被断除,所以是戏论已断者”。第二句也是同样的道理。在这里,众生的称谓只是在眼等诸根存在的情况下才成立,所以对已般涅槃者来说,称谓也只是依靠眼等而施设,并非另有其他方式。因此,询问已超越的佛陀所护持的眼、耳等是否还存在,就问:“尊者,有……吗?”如此等等。眼、耳等之轮会在轮回中运转。巴利
83. Taṇhāya pahīnāya diṭṭhimānāpi pahīnā evāti ‘‘taṇhāpapañcassa chinnattā chinnapapañce’’ti vuttaṃ. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Idha sattavohāro cakkhādīsu vijjamānesu eva hoti, tasmā parinibbutānañca vohāro cakkhādīsu sannissayeneva, nāññathāti atikkantabuddhehi pariharitāni cakkhusotādīni pucchāmīti pucchati ‘‘atthi nu kho bhante’’tiādinā. Cakkhusotādivaṭṭaṃ vaṭṭe pavatteyya.
1. 《败坏法经》的注释巴利
1. Palokadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
84 无常相本身已经被说明了,而且是以间接的方式说明的。当无常相被说明时,由于诸相不相离的缘故,其余诸相也就等同于已经被说明了。巴利
84.Aniccalakkhaṇameva kathitaṃ, tañca pariyāyena, aniccalakkhaṇe kathite itaralakkhaṇāni kathitāneva honti byabhicārabhāvato.
《空世间经》的注释巴利
2. Suññatalokasuttavaṇṇanā
85 他说“自己的”或“属于自己的”,指的是“属于自己的财物”。巴利
85. Attano idanti attaniyanti āha ‘‘attano santakenā’’ti.
3. 《略说法经》的注释巴利
3. Saṃkhittadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
86 应当按照前面已经讲过的方式来理解:在蕴品里,是从蕴的角度来讲的;在这里,则是从处的角度来讲的,差别就在这里。巴利
86.Vuttanayeneva veditabbanti khandhiyavagge khandhavasena āgataṃ, idha āyatanavasenāti ayameva viseso.
第4章《阐那经》的注释巴利
4. Channasuttavaṇṇanā
87 从一切相中独自隐退,因此称为“隐居”,也就是果等至。夺命的刀,因为它夺走生命,又对众生杀戮伤害。“侍奉”就是亲近侍奉。这是说明他们依照教导去实行。巴利
87. Sabbanimittehi paṭisallīyati etenāti paṭisallānaṃ, phalasamāpatti. Jīvitahārakasatthaṃ jīvitassa haraṇato, sattānañca sasanato hiṃsanato . Paricaritoti payirupāsito. Tena yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipajjinti dīpeti.
“无过患”是指不会被他人指责。这里又说“不再生起”,是因为未来不再有结生。当他说“这不是我的”等话时,是把这些放在阿罗汉果的层面上来讲的。他通过说明尚未完成应作之事,只是在显示凡夫的状态。虽然长老把所问的问题放在阿罗汉果的层面上来回答,但说“我没有见到”时,并没有说出任何证得,因此要引出“这也应当注意”,这样便衔接起来了。巴利
Anupavajjanti parehi na upavaditabbaṃ. Taṃ panettha āyatiṃ appaṭisandhibhāvato hotīti āha ‘‘appavattika’’nti. ‘‘Netaṃ mamā’’tiādīni vadanto arahatte pakkhipitvā kathesi. Puthujjanabhāvameva dīpento vadati akatakiccabhāvadīpanena. Kiñcāpi thero pucchitaṃ pañhaṃ arahatte pakkhipitvā kathesi, ‘‘na samanupassāmī’’ti pana vadanto kiñci nipphattiṃ na kathesi, tasmā ‘‘idampi manasi kātabba’’nti idaṃ ānetvā sambandho.
烦恼的止息,就是烦恼热恼的平息。为了再有而再有,就是渴望一再地存在。在阿赖耶中的喜贪与现起,就是指在对后有的期待这种被称为阿赖耶的状态中,喜贪生起并达到现起。当它不存在、没有时,以结生的方式从另一世来到此世,称为来;以死亡的方式从此世离去,称为去。随顺而去的,称为趣。这两者都不存在。死与生:以相续的方式称为死,以结生的方式称为生,这两者也不存在。这样,当死与生都不存在时,便不在此处,不在这个世界;不在彼处,不在他世。因此,不在两处。这个终点,即在此世和他世都不存在,就是苦的尽头。此即如前所说,在这段经文中,通过代代传承而成为标准的义理。巴利
Kilesapassaddhīti kilesapariḷāhavūpasamo. Bhavatthāya puna bhavatthāya. Ālayanikanti pariyuṭṭhāneti bhavantare apekkhāsaññite ālaye nikantiyā ca pariyuṭṭhānappattiyā. Asati avijjamānāya. Paṭisandhivasena aññabhavato idhāgamanaṃ āgati nāma. Cutivasena gamananti cavanavasena ito gati. Anurūpagamanaṃ gati nāma tadubhayaṃ na hoti. Cutūpapāto aparāparabhavanavasena cuti, upapajjanavasena upapāto, tadubhayampi na hoti. Evaṃ pana cutūpapāte asati nevidha na idha loke. Na huraṃ na paraloke hoti. Tato eva na ubhayattha hoti. Ayameva anto ayaṃ idhaloke paraloke ca abhāvoyeva dukkhassa pariyosānaṃ. Ayamevāti yathāvutto eva – ettha etasmiṃ pāṭhe paramparāgato pamāṇabhūto attho.
那些说“正说者”的人,是针对主张有中阴的人说的。他们想有中阴,认为“这样,一个存在与另一个存在之间的连接才说得通”。但这没有意义,因为所谓的中阴根本不存在。实际上,死亡的五蕴灭去之后,紧接着结生五蕴就现起了。因此说“中阴……已被驳斥”。这里,“有”就是存在。在阿毗达摩的《论事》里,它已被驳斥。如果是这样,那“antarena”这个词该怎么解释呢?所以说“antarena”等等。“antarena”是表示另一种分别,而不是指中阴,因为那样的东西根本找不到,也没有用处。因为,异熟识的缘在哪里,那里就有作为它依止的处所和同时生起的诸蕴;所以识是连同自己的依止一起生起的,因此不应认为它的生起有远近之分。“不在此处,不在彼处”这两种说法之外,另一种分别说“不在两处”,意思也是“不在那里”。或者,“antarena”是与“vinā”(离、无)同义的不变词,所以意思是:不在此,不在彼,也不是离这两处而另有。巴利
Ye panāti sammavādino sandhāya vadati. Antarābhavaṃ icchanti ‘‘evaṃ bhavena bhavantarasambandho yujjeyyā’’ti. Niratthakaṃ antarābhavassa nāma kassaci abhāvato. Cutikkhandhānantarañhi paṭisandhikkhandhānaṃyeva pātubhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘antarābhavassa…pe… paṭikkhittoyevā’’ti. Tattha bhāvoti atthitā. Abhidhamme kathāvatthuppakaraṇe (kathā. 505-507) paṭikkhittoyeva. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘antarenā’’ti idaṃ kathanti āha ‘‘antarenā’’tiādi. Vikappato aññaṃ vikappantaraṃ, tassa dīpanaṃ ‘‘antarenā’’ti vacanaṃ. Na antarābhavadīpanaṃ tādisassa anupalabbhanato payojanābhāvato ca. Yattha hi vipākaviññāṇassa paccayo, tatthassa nissayabhūtassa vatthussa sahabhāvīnañca khandhānaṃ sambhavoti saddhiṃ attano nissayena viññāṇaṃ uppajjatevāti nāssa uppattiyā desadūratā veditabbā. ‘‘Neva idha na hura’’nti vuttadvayato aparaṃ vikappena ‘‘na ubhaya’’nti, tatthapi na hotiyevāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Antarenā’’ti vā ‘‘vinā’’ti iminā samānattho nipāto, tasmā nevidha, na huraṃ, ubhayaṃ vināpi nevāti attho.
他“取”是指以割断的方式拿取,因此说“割断喉管”。“正在遍察”就是正在审察思惟。“已寂灭”,是因为长久以来一直投入于观照。他说“阐那比丘无可指责地取了刀”,这是像在无学阶段作出记说那样而说的。巴利
Āharīti chinnavasena gaṇhi. Tenāha ‘‘kaṇṭhanāḷaṃ chindī’’ti. Pariggaṇhantoti sammasanto. Parinibbuto dīgharattaṃ vipassanāyaṃ yuttapayuttabhāvato. ‘‘Anupavajjaṃ channena bhikkhunā satthaṃ āharita’’nti, kathesīti asekkhakāle byākaraṇaṃ viya katvā kathesi.
“以此”,就是通过“可指责之家”这句话。“长老”,指舍利弗长老。“如此”,是说:像这样在先前过着与俗家密切来往生活的人,后来还能证得阿罗汉果吗?因此对这件事心存疑虑而发问。其余的内容意义浅显。巴利
Imināti ‘‘upavajjakulānī’’ti iminā vacanena. Theroti sāriputtatthero. Evanti evaṃ pubbakālesu saṃsaṭṭhavihārī hutvā ṭhito pacchā arahattaṃ pāpuṇissatīti āsaṅkanto pucchati. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
5-6. 富楼那经等的注释巴利
5-6. Puṇṇasuttādivaṇṇanā
88-89 “那”指的是眼和色这两者,所以他说“眼与色”。“从喜集”的意思是:从喜的集起,也就是从渴爱连同其余原因的喜的聚合,称为喜集,因此说“从喜集”。所以他说“以渴爱的聚合”。被称为五蕴的苦,正是以这样的聚合而集起,也就是苦的持续生起。由于连同集一起显示了苦,所以说“使轮回达到顶点”。由于连同灭的方法一起显示了灭,所以说“使还灭达到顶点”。在提问等连结方式中,这不算其中任何一种,因此说“单独的连结”。巴利
88-89.Tanti cakkhurūpadvayaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhuñceva rūpañcā’’ti. Nandisamudayāti nandiyā samudayataṇhāya sesakāraṇehi nandiyā samuditi samodhānaṃ nandisamudayo, tasmā nandisamudayā. Tenāha ‘‘taṇhāya samodhānenā’’ti. Pañcakkhandhasaṅkhātassa dukkhassa samodhānena samuditi pavattiyevāti saha samudayena dukkhassa dassitattā ‘‘vaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nirodhūpāyena saddhiṃ nirodhassa dassitattā ‘‘vivaṭṭaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā’’ti. Pucchānusandhiādīsu aññataro na hotīti āha – ‘‘pāṭiyekko anusandhī’’ti.
“凶暴的”是指易怒的人。“恶的”意思是有嗔恚的人。“邪恶的”是指有罪的人。“粗暴的”是指残酷的人。“以锤矛”是指在一侧装上锤头而做成的短杖。因为伤害众生,所以叫“武器”;又因为正是从这一点上夺取生命,所以也叫“杀生者”,因此合起来就是“武器杀生者”。“调伏”这个词用在根律仪上,是因为调伏了以意为第六的诸根。用在慧上,是因为调伏、平息了与烦恼相伴的法。用在布萨羯磨上,是因为调伏了由身门等生起的不平等。用在忍耐上,应当理解为“调伏”,是因为调伏、平息了不忍耐。因此他说:“寂止就是调伏的同义词。”巴利
Caṇḍāti kodhanā. Duṭṭhāti dosavantoti attho. Kibbisāti pāpā. Kakkhaḷāti dāruṇā. Ghaṭikamuggarenāti ekasmiṃ pakkhe ghaṭikaṃ dassetvā katena rassadaṇḍena. Sattānaṃ sasanato satthaṃ, tato eva jīvitassa haraṇato hārakañcāti satthahārakaṃ. Indriyasaṃvaro ‘‘damo’’ti vutto manacchaṭṭhānaṃ indriyānaṃ damanato. Paññā ‘‘damo’’ti vuttā kilesavisevitānaṃ damanato vūpasamanato. Uposathakammaṃ ‘‘damo’’tivuttaṃ kāyadvārādīhi uppajjanakaasamassa damanato. Khanti ‘‘damo’’ti veditabbā akkhantiyā damanato vūpasamanato. Tenāha ‘‘upasamoti tasseva vevacana’’nti.
这里指的是苏那巴兰达地区。“这二位”是说富楼那长老和他的弟弟,这两个人是兄弟。“引发而住立”是说,他引发了对佛陀这一所缘的殊胜喜悦,就那样站在那里。“发出七种狮子吼”是为了表明:即使面对伤及要害的辱骂和诽谤,也能忍受、知足;面对用手掌打、用土块打、用棍棒打、用刀砍,乃至被夺去性命,也都能忍受、知足——就这样发出了七种狮子吼。因为他曾在四个地方住过,所以经文里没有特别指出住处,只笼统地说“住在苏那巴兰达地区”。巴利
Etthāti sunāparantajanapade. Ete dveti ayaṃ puṇṇatthero tassa kaniṭṭhoti ete dve bhātaro. Āhacca aṭṭhāsi uḷāraṃ buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ uppādetvā. Satta sīhanāde naditvāti mammacchedakānampi akkosaparibhāsānaṃ khamane santosābhāvadīpanaṃ, pāṇippahārassa, leḍḍuppahārassa, daṇḍappahārassa, satthappahārassa, jīvitavoropanassa, khamane santosābhāvadīpanañcāti evaṃ satta sīhanāde naditvā. Catūsu ṭhānesu vasitattā pāḷiyaṃ vasanaṭṭhānaṃ anuddesikaṃ katvā ‘‘sunāparantasmiṃ janapade viharati’’icceva vuttaṃ.
在四个地方:阿布哈塔山、海山寺、马土拉山和木库拉园寺,就是在这四个地方。登上那条经行道:没有任何比丘能够在上面经行,因为大海带来的危险太大,使得修行和作意都无法顺利进行。灾异:指引发大骚动的灾异。无风之处:指无风的地方。他们证入:就是他们证入了。巴利
Catūsu ṭhānesūti abbuhatthapabbate, samuddagirivihāre, mātulagirimhi, makuḷakārāmavihāreti imesu catūsu ṭhānesu. Tanti caṅkamaṃ āruyha koci bhikkhu caṅkamituṃ samattho natthi mahatā samuddaparissayena bhāvanāmanasikārassa anabhisambhuṇanato. Uppātikanti uppātakaraṃ mahāsaṅkhobhaṃ uṭṭhapetvā. Sammukheti anilapadese. Paṭivedesunti pavedesuṃ.
从开始建造的时候起,就是指从丈量土地、准备建造圆堂的时候开始。为了和萨查班达一起凑满五百人,所以说“差一个就满五百”。香室,就是祇园大寺里的大香室。巴利
Āraddhakālato paṭṭhāyāti maṇḍalamāḷassa kātuṃ pathavīmitakālato pabhuti. Saccabandhena pañcasatāni paripūretuṃ ‘‘ekūnapañcasatāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Gandhakuṭinti jetavanamahāvihāre mahāgandhakuṭiṃ.
名叫真谛结,是因为他长期住在真谛结山上,所以得到了“真谛结”这个名字。证得阿罗汉果,是指他获得了以五神通为伴随的阿罗汉果。因此说“他的神通是随着道一起生起的”。巴利
Saccabandhanāmoti saccabandhe pabbate ciranivāsitāya ‘‘saccabandho’’tveva laddhanāmo. Arahattaṃ pāpuṇīti pañcābhiññāparivāraṃ arahattaṃ adhigacchi. Tenāha ‘‘maggenevassa abhiññā āgatā’’ti.
那时聚集在一起的众人当中,有些是入流者,有些是一来者,有些是不来者,有些是阿罗汉。在那里也有一些人具足三明,有些人具足六种神通,有些人证得无碍解。就是针对这个情形才说“大众的束缚得到了解脱”。另外,那些在那里通过皈依、受持五戒或十戒而获得护佑的人,以及诸天,由于他们的缘故,才说“发生了佛陀的大轰动”。巴利
Tasmiṃ sannipatitā mahājanā keci sotāpannā, keci sakadāgāmino, keci anāgāmino, keci arahanto ahesuṃ. Tatthāpi keci tevijjā, keci chaḷabhiññā, keci paṭisambhidappattā ahesuṃ. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘mahājanassa bandhanamokkho jāto’’ti. Ye pana tattha saraṇagamanapañcasīladasasīlasamādānena laddhānuggahā, tesaṃ devatānañca vasena ‘‘mahantaṃ buddhakolāhalaṃ ahosī’’ti vuttaṃ.
天一亮,他就在大香室里起身,既是为了护助诸天,也是为了家族的兴旺。他被那些邪见者引上了恶道,他们执持这样的邪见:“有一个世界的支配者,凭着他的力量才有世间的生灭,因此这些众生才有了依靠,他令他们从事种种业。”他还乞求别人来服侍自己,说:“我要在这里久住。”巴利
Aruṇaṃpana mahāgandhakuṭiyaṃyeva uṭṭhapesi devatānuggahatthañceva kulānudayāya ca. Apāyamagge otārito ‘‘koci lokassa sajitā atthi, tassa vasena pavattisaṃhārā honti, tenevāyaṃ pajā sanāthā hoti, taṃ yuñjati ca tasmiṃ tasmiṃ kamme’’ti micchāgāhehi. Paricaritabbaṃ yāci ‘‘ettha mayā ciraṃ vasitabba’’nti.
第六,就是《婆醯经》。它很浅显,因为前面已经讲过已说的方法。巴利
Chaṭṭhanti bāhiyasuttaṃ. Taṃ uttānameva heṭṭhā vuttanayattā.
第7-8节 第一贪爱经等的注释巴利
7-8. Paṭhamaejāsuttādivaṇṇanā
90-91 90-91. 动摇六种所缘的相,就是动摇,所以叫“动”。因此说“以动摇之义”。以逼迫之义、以压迫之义。“以内嗔之义”:就是在内心里嗔怒之义。“以切割之义”:就是斩断之义。下面所引的,正是《断除慢执随应经》中已经出现的内容;而在《断除慢执经》中,所说的方法也是如此。巴利
90-91. Ejati chaḷārammaṇanimittaṃ kampatīti ejā. Tenāha ‘‘calanaṭṭhenā’’ti. Ābādhanaṭṭhena pīḷanaṭṭhena. Anto dosanaṭṭhenāti antocitte eva padussanaṭṭhena. Nikantanaṭṭhenāti chindanaṭṭhena. Heṭṭhā gahitamevāti heṭṭhā maññitasamugghātasāruppasutte āgatameva. Vuttanayameva maññitasamugghātasutte.
9-10. 《第一双经》等经的注释巴利
9-10. Paṭhamadvayasuttādivaṇṇanā
92-93 “双”就是一对。经文里为了省略重复,才这样指示,所以说“两两部分”。“如是此”,就是依无常等性质,这眼与色等便成为一对“双”。“动摇”,就是由于不安住而摇摆。“战栗”,就是因老与死而颤抖。它既是因,因为它是生起的相。“俱行”指一同生起,由于要借此来把握它,所以“结合”说的就是触。这个道理也适用于其余两组词。又因为离开了正在结合的法,并没有所谓的“结合”,集会与和合也是如此;由它们所产生的触,才被这样称呼。因此他说“以此”等。巴利
92-93.Dvayanti dukaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ āmeḍitalopena niddesoti āha ‘‘dve dve koṭṭhāse’’ti. Evametanti evaṃ aniccādibhāvena etaṃ cakkhurūpañcāti dvayaṃ. Calatīti anavaṭṭhānena pacalati. Byathatīti jarāya maraṇena ca pavedhati. Hetu ceva uppattinimittattā. Sahagatīti sahappavatti, tāya gahetabbattā ‘‘saṅgatī’’ti phasso vutto. Esa nayo sesapadadvayepi. Yasmā ca saṃgacchamānadhammavimuttā saṅgati nāma natthi, tathā sannipātasamavāyā, tesaṃ vasena nibbatto phasso tathā vuccatīti. Tenāha ‘‘iminā’’tiādi.
所谓“处”,就是眼,因为它以依止缘等方式充当依处。所谓“所缘”,就是色,因为它以所缘缘等方式充当所缘。与眼识俱生的受等三蕴,则以俱生缘等方式存在。这里说的“此因”,就是指这三种因。关于“以触”等句,简要的意思是:在以色为所缘的触正在执行它自己的接触作用时,受就这样执行领纳的作用,想执行认知的作用;所以,“为触所触”等话所说的义理,现在为了从补特伽罗的角度来显示,就说成“被触”等。世尊以三十种方式说明了五蕴。为什么呢?于是他说“如何”等。就像树枝上也可以用“树”这个称呼一样,在每一个法上也都可以用“蕴”这个称呼。因此世尊说:“识即识蕴。”(《双论·蕴双论》2)巴利
Vatthūti cakkhu nissayapaccayādibhāvena. Ārammaṇanti rūpaṃ ārammaṇapaccayādibhāvena. Sahajātā tayo khandhā vedanādayo, te sahajātādipaccayabhāvena. Ayaṃ hetūti ayaṃ tividho hetū. Phassenātiādīsu ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yasmā rūpārammaṇe phasse attano phusanakiccaṃ karonte evaṃ vedanā anubhavanakiccaṃ, saññā sañjānanakiccaṃ karoti, tasmā ‘‘phassena phuṭṭhamevā’’tiādivuttameva atthaṃ idāni puggalādhiṭṭhānena dassetuṃ ‘‘phuṭṭho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pañceva khandhā bhagavatā samatiṃsāya ākārehi vuttā. Kasmāti āha ‘‘katha’’ntiādi. Rukkhasākhāsu rukkhavohāro viya ekekadhammepi khandhavohāro hotiyeva. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘viññāṇaṃ viññāṇakkhandho’’ti (yama. khandhayamaka 2).
《未调伏未守护经》的注释巴利
1. Adantaaguttasuttavaṇṇanā
94 “未调伏”是指没有达到调伏、不随顺的状态。“不守护”是指没有被名为念的篱笆保护。“未关闭”是指没有被名为念的门闩关闭。他用这四个词说明了诸根没有被遮障。“增上承载者”就是额外背负者,苦的增上承载者就是苦重负者。“地狱的”是指在地狱中生起。而“等”这个词涵盖了其余的文句。巴利
94.Adamitāti damaṃ nibbisevanabhāvaṃ anītā. Agopitāti satisaṅkhātāya vatiyā na rakkhitā. Apihitāti satikavāṭena na pihitā. Catūhipi padehi indriyānaṃ anāvaraṇamevāha. Adhikaṃ vahantīti adhivāhā, dukkhassa adhivāhā dukkhādhivāhā. Nirayesu uppajjanakaṃ nerayikaṃ. Ādi-saddena sesapāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
Saḷevāti:把 cha 这个音变成 sa 音,再插入 ḷa 音来连接两个词。Yatthāti:这是处格,表示“原因”的意思。Anavassutā atintāti:意思是还没有被贪欲渗透、浸染。巴利
Saḷevāti cha-kārassa sa-kāro, ḷa-kāro padasandhikaro. Yatthāti nimittatthe bhummaṃ. Anavassutā atintāti rāgena atemitā.
已尝味者,就是已经到达了乐味。因此他说“具有乐味”。“乐与苦”,指可意和不可意。“随转”,就是因。触是它的随转,所以他说“触随转”,也就是“以触为因”。“不相违”这个说法,是省略了格尾来表达的。巴利
Assāditanti assādaṃ itaṃ upagataṃ. Tenāha ‘‘assādavanta’’nti. Sukhadukkhanti iṭṭhāniṭṭhaṃ. Anvayatīti anvayo, hetu. Phassoti anvayo etassāti phassanvayanti āha – ‘‘phassahetuka’’nti. ‘‘Aviruddha’’iti vibhattilopena niddeso.
戏论想,就是与渴爱等混杂在一起的想。因此说“戏论想名为烦恼想而成为”。这些众生有戏论想,所以叫戏论想者,也就是各类众生。戏论著,就是在轮回中不断造作戏论、让它长久延续。有想者,就是怀着居家之想的人。意所成的寻,就是纯粹由心所生起的邪寻。行动,就是践行其行为方式。巴利
Papañcasaññāti taṇhādisamadhūpasaṃhatasaññā. Tenāha ‘‘kilesasaññāya papañcasaññā nāma hutvā’’ti. Papañcasaññā etesaṃ atthīti papañcasaññā, itarītarā narā. Papañcayantāti saṃsāre papañcaṃ cirāyanaṃ karontā. Saññinoti gehassitasaññāya saññāvanto. Manomayaṃ vitakkanti kevalaṃ manasā sambhāvitaṃ micchāvitakkaṃ. Irīyatīti iriyaṃ paṭipattiṃ irīyati paṭipajjati.
善修习,就是通过这里的善修习而达到善修习的状态。被触者的心,就是他的心被前面所说的触所触。于任何处皆不动摇,就是在任何可意或不可意的所缘上都不动摇。到彼岸者,就是你们要成为到彼岸的人。巴利
Suṭṭhu bhāvitoti suṭṭhubhāvaṃ subhāvanaṃ ito bhāvitabhāvito. Phuṭṭhassa cittanti tena yathāvuttaphassena phuṭṭhaṃ assa cittaṃ. Na vikampate kvacīti kismiñci iṭṭhāniṭṭhārammaṇe na kampati. Pāragāti pāragāmino bhavatha.
《摩罗迦子经》的注释巴利
2. Mālukyaputtasuttavaṇṇanā
95 贬抑就是呵斥,推崇就是赞扬。据说这位长老就是摩罗迦子。放逸之后:意思是由于没有致力于如理作意,所以放逸了。巴利
95.Apasādetīti tajjeti. Ussādetīti ukkaṃseti. Ayaṃ kira thero mālukyaputto. Pamajjitvāti yonisomanasikārassa ananuyujjanena pamajjitvā.
“Yatra(在……当中)”这个说法,是用于强调各自本身的修辞表达。“名(nāma)”这个词,在表示不认可、贬低的时候用,而在表示推崇、赞许的时候则用。“成了什么”意思是:凭那副老迈之身,他还能成什么?——他连长老的身份都视如草芥,这样说道。因此他说:“如果……(中略)……不顾念。”“不顾念”就是不这样思量。他这是在称赞当下的教诫:“像我这样的人,世尊的教诫确实能带来利益。”巴利
Yatrāti paccattaṃ vacanālaṅkāre. Nāmāti asambhāvane apasādanapakkhe, ussādanapakkhe pana sambhāvane. Kiṃ jātanti kiṃ tena mahallakabhāvena jātanti mahallakabhāvaṃ tiṇāyapi amaññamāno vadati. Tenāha ‘‘yadi…pe… anuggaṇhanto’’ti. Anuggaṇhantoti acintento. Mādisānaṃ bhagavato ovādo upakārāvahoti etarahi ovādañca pasaṃsanto.
以“未见、以前从未见过”等说法,通过假设的方式所作的说明,是为了实行这样的方法:正如在这些事物中没有欲等,同样,在其余已被遍知的事物中也没有;因为那些事物也应当与这些同等看待。因此说:“诸欲如梦。”巴利
‘‘Adiṭṭhā adiṭṭhapubbā’’tiādinā parikappavasena vuttanidassanaṃ ‘‘yathā etesu chandādayo na honti, evamitaresupi pariññātesū’’ti nayapaṭipajjanatthaṃ, tesampi imehi samānetabbattā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘supinakūpamā kāmā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.234; 2.46; pāci. 417; cūḷava. 65).
眼识对所见的,仅仅停留在所见本身,意思是:眼识对色处的取境方式有多少,就只是那么多。那它的量到底是多少呢?这是只有自己才能体验、无法给别人看的,只是概念假立出来的色。因此说“因为眼识……”等等。“于色”是指在色处上。“唯色而已”是指仅仅就是色处本身这个层面,而不是青、黄等具体的差别。这里的“仅”字正是为了排除那些差别。如果这样的话,那“唯”字又有什么用呢?因为眼识虽然在色处上能够取到对象,但并不会去执取“这是青色,这是黄色”之类的差别。又怎么会去执取常、无常等自性呢?为了排除这种疑惑,连已经结合在一起的也要排除,所以采用了“唯”字。因此说“并非恒常等自性”。“其余诸识亦然”是说即使在速行识中也是如此。巴利
Cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhe diṭṭhamattanti cakkhuviññāṇassa rūpāyatanaṃ yattako gahaṇākāro, tattakaṃ. Kittakaṃ pamāṇanti attasaṃvediyaṃ parassa na disitabbaṃ, kappanāmattaṃ rūpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇaṃ hī’’tiādi. Rūpeti rūpāyatane. Rūpamattamevāti nīlādibhedaṃ rūpāyatanamattaṃ, na nīlādi. Visesanivattanattho hi ayaṃ matta-saddo. Yadi evaṃ, eva-kāro kimatthiyo? Cakkhuviññāṇañhi rūpāyatane labbhamānampi nīlādivisesaṃ ‘‘idaṃ nīlaṃ nāma, idaṃ pītaṃ nāmā’’ti na gaṇhāti. Kuto niccāniccādisabhāvatthanti saṃhitassapi nivattanatthaṃ evakāraggahaṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘na niccādisabhāva’’nti. Sesaviññāṇehipīti javanaviññāṇehipi.
所谓“所见”,是指眼识对色处的看见,因此说“在诸色中识别色”。意思是:眼识对色处的取境有多少,我的心就只停留在那么多。也有写成“以无贪等”的版本。从词义上说,“所见”就是被眼识所见的色。“就在那里”是指在眼识仅仅看见色的那个地方。所谓“三种心仅止于所见”,是说它们像眼识一样,因为远离贪等而生起。因此说“正如那样……”等等。巴利
Diṭṭhaṃ nāma cakkhuviññāṇaṃ rūpāyatanassa dassananti katvā. Tenāha ‘‘rūpe rūpavijānana’’nti. Cakkhuviññāṇamattamevāti yattakaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ rūpāyatane gahaṇamattaṃ, taṃmattameva me sabbaṃ cittaṃ bhavissatīti attho. ‘‘Rāgādirahenā’’ti vā pāṭho. Diṭṭhaṃ nāma padatthato cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhaṃ rūpaṃ. Tatthevāti cakkhuviññāṇena diṭṭhamatte rūpe. Cittattayaṃ diṭṭhamattaṃ nāma cakkhuviññāṇaṃ viya rāgādivirahena pavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘yathā ta’’nti ādi.
以意门转向而了知的所缘,就是这里所说的“已了知”,因为它是从远离贪等、可以被了知的角度来说的。因此说“如同以转向……”等等。巴利
Manodvārāvajjanenaviññātārammaṇaṃ viññātanti adhippetaṃ rāgādivirahena viññeyyato. Tenāha ‘‘yathā āvajjanenā’’tiādi.
“那时”是指在那个时刻,不是指从那时以后——这里要表达的就是这个意思。以“仅止于所见”等说法所要遮除的那些贪等烦恼,在这里是用“彼”这个词来指代它们,所以说“被那贪所染……”等。“于彼处”是处格,表示领域;而领域的状态,必须通过它与具有领域者的关系来理解,因此说“被系缚……”等。巴利
Tadāti tasmiṃ kāle, na tato paṭṭhāyāti ayamettha atthoti dasseti. ‘‘Diṭṭhamatta’’ntiādinā yesaṃ rāgādīnaṃ nivattanaṃ adhippetaṃ, te ‘‘tenā’’ti ettha ta-saddena paccāmasīyantīti ‘‘tena rāgena vā ratto’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatthāti visaye bhummaṃ, visayabhāvo ca visayinā sambandhavasena icchitabboti vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭibaddho’’tiādi.
所谓“念”,就是对色法如实地把握其特征。因为当念忘失时,由于对可爱相作意,念便不能生起,所以念不显现、不运作。“执取”就是牢牢抓住,也就是吞下、彻底消化之后,把它当成自己的东西。巴利
Satīti rūpassa yathāsabhāvasallakkhaṇā sati muṭṭhā piyanimittamanasikārena anuppajjanato na dissati nappavattati. Ajjhosāti ajjhosāya. Gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā attaniyakaraṇena.
贪欲和恼害,这里用的是表示动作的独立格形式,所以经文说“以贪欲和恼害”。接着又按含义把格的形式作了转换,所以说“以贪欲和恼害”。累积的人,就是增长的人。具念的人,就是在一切处都与念相应的人。至于“及随顺者”中的“及”字和“亦”字,它们只是不变词,所以意思就直接说成“对于随顺的人”。巴利
Abhijjhā ca vihesā cāti karaṇatthe paccattavacananti āha – ‘‘abhijjhāya ca vihesāya cā’’ti. Atthavasena vibhattipariṇāmoti āha – ‘‘abhijjhāvihesāhī’’ti. Ācinantassāti vaḍḍhentassa. Paṭissatoti patissato sabbattha satiyā yutto. Sevato cāpīti ettha ca-saddo api-saddo ca nipātamattanti ‘‘sevantassa’’icceva attho vutto.
3. 《退失经》的注释巴利
3. Parihānasuttavaṇṇanā
96 “退失的本质”是指从无过失的诸法中退失的本质。“已被征服”是指以不再被亲近受用的方式被征服。“自己的意图”是指心在种种所缘境上不能安住而生的意图。“应被结缚的”是指应被结缚的所缘。因为一再给结缚的生起提供机会,所以就说他是在忍受烦恼类。烦恼本身就是烦恼类。而在心中执取所缘,就叫做忍受。他不是通过舍断欲贪来舍弃所缘,而是通过让烦恼不再生起的法性来舍弃。“已被征服的处”是依“忍受”等道理而说的。世尊先问法:“诸比丘,什么是退失法呢?”然后以“如果那位比丘忍受那个”等语加以分别,通过补特伽罗、以补特伽罗为立足点,显示了此法。巴利
96.Parihānasabhāvanti anavajjadhammehi parihāyanasabhāvaṃ. Abhibhavitānīti abhibhūtāni nibbisevanabhāvākārena. Sarasaṅkappāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ visaye anavaṭṭhitabhāvena saṅkappā. Saṃyojaniyāti saṃyojetabbā. Saṃyojanānañhi punappunaṃ uppattiyā okāsaṃ dento kilesajātaṃ adhivāseti nāma. Kileso eva kilesajātaṃ. Ārammaṇaṃ pana citte karonto adhivāseti nāma. Chandarāgappahānena na pajahati ārammaṇaṃ, kilesaṃ pana anuppattidhammatāpādanena eva. Abhibhavitaṃ āyatananti kathitaṃ adhivāsanādinā. ‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, parihānadhammo hotī’’ti dhammaṃ pucchitvā taṃ vibhajantena bhagavatā ‘‘tañce bhikkhu adhivāsetī’’tiādinā puggalena puggalādhiṭṭhānena dhammo dassito.
《放逸住者经》的注疏巴利
4. Pamādavihārīsuttavaṇṇanā
97 没有守护眼根、没有遮蔽、没有覆盖眼根而安住的人,烦恼就特别地浇灌他。被烦恼浸透,就是被烦恼漏泄。弱喜,是指初生、还没达到强盛的喜。强喜,是指已经生起踊跃并遍满全身的喜。除恼轻安,是指以止息身心躁动为特征的轻安。这些喜和轻安不生起,是因为其生起所需的因缘次第还不具足。世尊先用“诸比丘,什么是放逸住者?”等问题问及这个人,接着又通过“没有欢悦,欢悦生起”等说法,并以“放逸住者”和“不放逸住者”的法义来阐明这个人。巴利
97.Napidahitvā cakkhundriyaṃ na pidahitvā sañchāditvā ṭhitassa. Byāsiñcatīti kilesehi visesena āsiñcati. Kilesatintanti kilesehi avassutaṃ. Dubbalapīti taruṇā na balappattā. Balavapīti ubbegā pharaṇappattā ca pīti. Darathappassaddhīti kāyacittadarathavūpasamalakkhaṇā passaddhi. Na uppajjanti paccayaparamparāya asiddhattā. ‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, pamādavihārī hotī’’tiādinā puggalaṃ pucchitvā ‘‘pāmojjaṃ na hoti, pāmojjaṃ jāyatī’’tiādinā ca, dhammena ‘‘pamādavihārī appamādavihārī’’ti ca puggalo dassito.
5. 《摄护经》的注疏巴利
5. Saṃvarasuttavaṇṇanā
98 这里的“此”指的是“诸比丘,怎样是非防护?”这句话。这是从宣说应断之法的角度来说的,也就是只说了应断之法。先问“诸比丘,怎样是非防护?”这个法,然后以“诸比丘,有眼所识之色”等来分别法本身。巴利
98.Idanti ‘‘kathañca, bhikkhave, asaṃvaro’’ti? Idaṃ vacanaṃ. Pahātabbadhammakkhānavasenāti pahātabbadhammasseva kathanaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, asaṃvaro hotī’’ti dhammaṃ pucchitvā ‘‘santi, bhikkhave, cakkhuviññeyyā rūpā’’tiādinā dhammova vibhatto.
第6《定经》的注释巴利
6. Samādhisuttavaṇṇanā
99 “心一境性”是指依靠止(奢摩他)而得到的心一境性。“衰退时”是指因为得不到它而衰退的时候。“业处”是指观业处,或者就只是指止本身。巴利
99.Cittekaggatāyāti samathavasena cittekaggatāya. Parihāyamāneti tassa alābhena parihāyamāne. Kammaṭṭhānanti vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ, samathameva vā.
第7《独处经》的注释巴利
7. Paṭisallānasuttavaṇṇanā
100 业处,就是止与观的修行业处。巴利
100.Kammaṭṭhānanti samathavipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ.
8-9. 第一《非你们所有经》等的注释巴利
8-9. Paṭhamanatumhākaṃsuttādivaṇṇanā
101-102 把譬喻放在一边,意思是抛开譬喻。以纯粹的方式,意思是离开譬喻,仅仅如此。巴利
101-102.Upamaṃ parivāretvāti upamaṃ pariharitvā. Suddhikavasenāti upamāya vinā kevalameva.
《水经》的注释巴利
10. Udakasuttavaṇṇanā
103 水是那个人的名字。吠陀指智慧。胜一切者的意思是已经战胜了一切。埋入的指被埋入的。应涂抹的法指具有应被涂抹的性质。应揉搓的法指具有应被揉搓的性质。被保护的指已受到保护。本来应该说以米饭、凝乳食品、积聚、涂抹、揉搓等词句。但这里只取了涂抹或揉搓本身的含义,所以没有采用那种说法。巴利
103.Udakoti tassa nāmaṃ. Vedaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Sabbaṃ jitavāti sabbaji. Avakhatanti nikhataṃ. Ucchādanadhammoti ucchādetabbasabhāvo. Parimaddanadhammoti parimadditabbasabhāvo. Parihatoti pariharito. Odanakummāsūpacayucchādanaparimaddanapadehīti vattabbaṃ. Ucchādanaṃ vā parimaddanamattamevāti katvā na gahitaṃ.
第11品 瑜伽安稳品巴利
11. Yogakkhemivaggo
《瑜伽安稳经》的注释巴利
1. Yogakkhemisuttavaṇṇanā
104 以四种轭,是指以欲轭等四种轭。“安稳者”,是指具足安稳的善巧者。“作为原因”,是指对应作之方便成为原因。“法门”:能使人了知流转与还灭,所以叫法门;这个法既是教法意义上的法,又是法门,所以叫“法门”,即指这个法门。然而,因为这个法门是证得那安稳的原因,所以说“法因”。“相应的”,是指与止观相应的诸法,或是指与四谛相应的诸法。提出“因此”这个词之后,问“为什么”,并分析为“是因为宣说呢,还是因为舍断”来发问。然而,因为舍断欲贪才是成为安稳者的原因,而不是宣说,所以说了“因舍断”等。巴利
104.Catūhiyogehīti kāmayogādīhi catūhi yogehi. Kheminoti khemavato kusalino. Kāraṇabhūtanti kattabbaupāyassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ. Pariyāyati pavattiṃ nivattiñca ñāpetīti pariyāyo, dhammo ca so pariyattidhammattā pariyāyo cāti dhammapariyāyo, taṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ. Yasmā pana so tassādhigamassa kāraṇaṃ hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammakāraṇa’’nti. Yuttinti samathavipassanādhammānīti vā catusaccadhammānīti vā. ‘‘Tasmā’’ti padaṃ uddharitvā – ‘‘kasmā’’ti kāraṇaṃ pucchanto ‘‘kiṃ akkhātattā, udāhu pahīnattā’’ti vibhajitvā pucchi. Yasmā pana chandarāgappahānaṃ yogakkhemibhāvassa kāraṇaṃ, na kathanaṃ, tasmā ‘‘pahīnattā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
2-10. 《执取经》等经的注释巴利
2-10. Upādāyasuttādivaṇṇanā
105-113 105-113.“受乐苦”:这里说的是被称为“受”的乐和苦。因为经中说“内的乐、苦”,又讲了解脱之乐和六处之苦,所以可以知道,出离之乐在这里也已经说到了。虽然《蕴相应品》是按蕴来开示,不是按处来开示,但这里要说明的义理,和《蕴相应品》所讲的方式是一样的。巴利
105-113.Vedanāsukhadukkhanti vedanāsaṅkhātaṃ sukhañca dukkhañca kathitaṃ. ‘‘Ajjhattaṃ sukhaṃ dukkha’’nti vuttattā vimuttisukhassa ca saḷāyatanadukkhassa ca kathitattā vivaṭṭasukhaṃ cettha kathitamevāti sakkā viññātuṃ. Kāmaṃ khandhiyavagge khandhavasena desanā āgatā, na āyatanavasena. Ettha pana vattabbaṃ atthajātaṃ khandhiyavagge vuttanayamevāti.
第十二 世间欲乐功德品巴利
12. Lokakāmaguṇavaggo
1-2. 第一《魔网经》等注释巴利
1-2. Paṭhamamārapāsasuttādivaṇṇanā
114-115 114-115. 烦恼魔住在这里,所以叫“住处”,也就是五欲的内在和外在的处所。已经进入烦恼魔的住处,就是落入了它的掌控。所谓“三种”,是指被称为戏论想的三种魔。由此就可以知道,也已经落入了天子魔的掌控。巴利
114-115. Āvasati ettha kilesamāroti āvāso. Kāmaguṇaajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni. Kilesamārassa āvāsaṃ gato vasaṃ gato. Tividhassāti papañcasaññāsaṅkhātassa tividhassapi mārassa. Tato eva devaputtamārassapi vasaṃ gatoti sakkā viññātuṃ.
3. 《到世界尽头经》的注释巴利
3. Lokantagamanasuttavaṇṇanā
116 116. 在这里,“世间”指的是有情群体、草木山河等依止之处,也就是轮围世界。而“行”则因为具有不断毁坏、崩坏的意义,所以也叫“世间”。“边际”就是终点、尽头。“以一切知智加以对照”的意思是:依照一切知智的运作方式来做比对,使两者不相违背、彼此吻合。“我将称赞”就是我要加以赞叹。巴利
116. Lokiyanti ettha sattakāyabhūtagāmādīti loko, cakkavāḷo. Saṅkhāro pana lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko. Antanti osānaṃ. Sabbaññutaññāṇena saṃsanditvāti sabbaññutaññāṇagatiyā samānetvā avirodhetvā. Thomessāmīti pasaṃsissāmi.
“具有如是成就”是指:能这样成就、应当这样看待,这就是我的请求。因此他说“就是如此”,意思是“如此是其义”。“了知者了知”:他是以一切知智了知应当了知的一切。因为停留在部分智慧的人,并不能了知一切应当了知的。由于这里用了最高程度的说明,又采取不加区分的整体涵盖,所以“了知”这个词就统摄了无余的一切所知种类;因此,与了知这一切为对象的认知活动相应,唯有以一切知智作为其工具才是合理的。依照本论的文境,以及“世尊”一词的邻近关联,这个意思也应当阐明。“见应见者”:以天眼、慧眼、法眼、佛眼、普眼这五种总称为智眼的眼,如实照见所应见的对象。或者,“了知者了知”:正如其他有颠倒的人——那些主张遍知欲界色界的人——虽然了知,却是以颠倒而了知;世尊则不是这样。世尊由于已断颠倒,所以了知时就是了知;由于没有邪见之见,所以见时就是见。这就是其义。巴利
Evaṃsampattikanti evaṃsampajjanakaṃ evaṃpassitabbaṃ idaṃ mama ajjhesanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘īdisanti attho’’ti. Jānaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇena jānitabbaṃ jānāti eva. Na hi padesaññāṇe ṭhito jānitabbaṃ sabbaṃ jānāti. Ukkaṭṭhaniddesena hi avisesaggahaṇena ca ‘‘jāna’’nti iminā niravasesaṃ ñeyyajātaṃ pariggayhatīti tabbisayāya jānanakiriyāya sabbaññutaññāṇameva karaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttaṃ. Pakaraṇavasena ‘‘bhagavā’’ti padasannidhānena ca ayamattho vibhāvetabbo. Passitabbameva passatīti dibbacakkhu-paññācakkhu-dhammacakkhu-buddhacakkhu-samantacakkhu-saṅkhātehi ñāṇacakkhūhi passitabbaṃ passati eva. Atha vā jānaṃ jānātīti yathā aññe savipallāsā kāmarūpapariññāvādino jānantāpi vipallāsavasena jānanti, na evaṃ bhagavā. Bhagavā pana pahīnavipallāsattā jānanto jānāti eva, diṭṭhidassanassa abhāvā passanto passati evāti attho.
以“引导见”的作用来说:就像眼引导、促成众生的看见,同样,由于能促成对世间的如实知见,所以以引导见的作用而成为“眼”;或者因为是慧眼所成,也就是以自生智成就、证得慧眼,所以称为“成为眼者”。“成为智者”也应同样理解。或者说,诸菩提分法——由于他依这些法而生起,也令世间生起这些法,或者证得了不与他人共通的独特之法,所以称为“成为法者”。道智在最胜的意义上称为“梵”,由于他依此而生起,也令世间生起此,并且以自生智证得它,所以称为“成为梵者”。他宣说四圣谛之法,所以是宣说者。他长久地使对真理的证悟持续流传并宣说,所以是流转者。引出义,就是抽取出苦等义;或者使人达到第一义,也就是涅槃。他令众生中生起对不死的亲证,施予不死,所以是不死的施与者。因为菩提分法归属于他,所以是法主。一再让人祈请,使之成为郑重,就是作尊重想;同样,先使之成为难解而后才宣说,也是如此。巴利
Dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhenāti yathā cakkhu sattānaṃ dassanatthaṃ pariṇeti sādheti, evaṃ lokassa yāthāvadassanasādhanatopi dassanakiccapariṇāyakaṭṭhena cakkhubhūto, paññācakkhumayattā vā sayambhūñāṇena paññācakkhuṃ bhūto pattoti vā cakkhubhūto. Ñāṇabhūtoti etassa ca evameva attho daṭṭhabbo. Dhammā vā bodhipakkhiyā, tehi uppannattā lokassa ca taduppādanato anaññasādhāraṇaṃ vā dhammaṃ patto adhigatoti dhammabhūto. ‘‘Brahmā’’vuccati seṭṭhaṭṭhena maggañāṇaṃ, tena uppannattā lokassa ca taduppādanato tañca sayambhūñāṇena pattoti brahmabhūto. Catusaccadhammaṃ vadatīti vattā. Ciraṃ saccapaṭivedhaṃ pavattento vadatīti pavattā. Atthaṃ nīharitvāti dukkhādiatthaṃ uddharitvā. Paramatthaṃ vā nibbānaṃ pāpayitā. Amatasacchikiriyaṃ sattesu uppādento amataṃ dadātīti amatassa dātā. Bodhipakkhiyadhammānaṃ tadāyattabhāvato dhammassāmī. Punappunaṃ yācāpento bhāriyaṃ karonto garuṃ karoti nāma, tathā duviññeyyaṃ katvā kathentopi.
眼睛存在时,才有对世间的认知;眼睛不存在时,就没有。因为如果没有内在的感官,就不会有“世间”这个说法。所以经中说“眼就是世间”等等。所谓“未断见者”,就是还没有彻底消除有身见的人,他没办法把整体和部分分开来分析,于是把部分当成整体一样,认知为“世间”,并且执取为“世间”。“如是”这个词,是把“认知为世间并且执取为世间”这三句一起带出来的。“其”指的是凡夫,或者指轮围世间。因为凡夫正是把眼等连同它们所在的地方,一起认知为“轮围”。所谓“以步行”,就是用脚走。无法到达,因为它们无穷无尽。所谓“以坏灭之义”,是为了依行作世间来说明世间的尽头。它的尽头就是涅槃。涅槃是可以到达的,因为通过正确的修行能够证得。至于轮围世间,则没有尽头,因为靠步行无法到达。巴利
Cakkhunā vijjamānena lokasaññī hoti, na tasmiṃ asati. Na hi ajjhattikāyatanavirahena lokasamaññā atthi. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhuñhi loko’’tiādi. Appahīnadiṭṭhīti asamūhatasakkāyadiṭṭhiko ghanavinibbhogaṃ kātuṃ asakkonto samudāyaṃ viya avayavaṃ ‘‘loko’’ti sañjānāti ceva maññati ca. Tathāti iminā ‘‘lokoti sañjānāti ceva maññati cā’’ti padattayaṃ ākaḍḍhati. Tassāti puthujjanassa, cakkavāḷalokassa vā. Cakkhādimeva hi sahokāsena ‘‘cakkavāḷo’’ti puthujjano sañjānāti. Gamanenāti padasā gamanena. Na sakkā tesaṃ anantattā. Lujjanaṭṭhenāti abhisaṅkhāralokavasena lokassa antaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa anto nāma nibbānaṃ. Taṃ pattuṃ sakkā sammāpaṭipattiyā pattabbattā. Cakkavāḷalokassa pana anto nāma, natthi tassa gamanena appattabbattā.
用这些词,就是通过这些划分句子的词。而它们的特征在于字母的集合,所以他说“以字母的聚合”。所谓“以各别字母”,意思是在每一个词当中,按各自固定的排列,被心一一分别取到的那些字母。巴利
Imehi padehīti imehi vākyavibhāgehi padehi. Tāni pana akkharasamudāyalakkhaṇānīti āha ‘‘akkharasampiṇḍanehī’’ti. Pāṭiyekkaakkharehīti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pade paṭiniyatasannivesehi visuṃ visuṃ cittena gayhamānehi akkharehīti attho.
以“前往”的含义,“paṇḍā”被称为慧;依靠这种慧而从此处到达彼处的人,就是贤者,也就是有慧的人。所谓“大慧”,应当从无碍解的角度来理解,所以说“大义”等。“yathā taṃ”中的taṃ,在第一种解释里只是语助词,在第二种解释里则是回指,所以说“那已作了解释”。巴利
Gamanaṭṭhena ‘‘paṇḍā’’ vuccati paññā, tāya ito gato pattoti paṇḍito, paññavā. Mahāpaññatā nāma paṭisambhidāvasena veditabbāti āha ‘‘mahante atthe’’tiādi. Yathā tanti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ paṭhamavikappe, dutiyavikappe pana paccāmasananti āha ‘‘taṃ byākata’’nti.
《欲功德经》的注疏解释巴利
4. Kāmaguṇasuttavaṇṇanā
117 “心的”一词是表示工具的属格。所谓“以心接触”,意思就是体验,所以说“过去曾以心体验过”。按照三个季节的适宜情况,有三种宫殿;依据这一点,就有三种戏剧的分类。仅仅以心意愉悦这一点,就把它说成五欲功德,而不是从贪欲的角度来说。因为自从出家以后,菩萨心中确实从未生起过欲的寻思。因此,邪恶者魔罗说——巴利
117.Cetasoti karaṇe sāmivacanaṃ. Cittena saṃphusanaṃ nāma anubhavoti āha ‘‘cittena anubhūtapubbā’’ti. Ututtayānurūpatāvasena pāsādattayaṃ, taṃ vasena tividhanāṭakabhedo. Manorammatāmattena kāmaguṇaṃ katvā dassitaṃ, na kāmavasena. Na hi abhinikkhamanato uddhaṃ bodhisattassa kāmavitakkā bhūtapubbā. Tenāha māro pāpimā –
“七年之中,我紧随世尊,步步不离;
我没能找到任何机会接近这位具足正念的正觉者。巴利
‘‘Satta vassāni bhagavantaṃ, anubandhiṃ padāpadaṃ; Otāraṃ nādhigacchissaṃ, sambuddhassa satīmato’’ti. (su. ni. 448);
“弥勒”等名号,只是显示未来所缘,并不是菩萨会生起这样的想法。“attā”是可亲可爱的样子,所以叫“attarūpo”;在后一个词中省略了前一个词,因此说的是“以自己想要利益自己的那种心态”。“attarūpena”则是指被喜与悦所摄取的体性,也就是满足、欢喜、兴高采烈的状态。“不放逸”是指在善法上不疏忽、不残缺,所以说“持续精勤”。“无放舍”是指心不放弃、不纵入五欲之中。前一种解释是从修善的角度显示的,后一种是从不造作不善的角度显示的。“二法”,就是不放逸与念这二法。应当知道,不放逸与念以及如此生起的四种善法蕴。说“应作”,意思是应当修习。巴利
Metteyyo nāmātiādi anāgatārammaṇadassanamattaṃ, na bodhisattassa evaṃ uppajjatīti. Attā piyāyitabbarūpo etassāti attarūpo, uttarapade purimapadalopenāti ‘‘attano hitakāmajātikenā’’ti attho vutto. Attarūpenāti vā pītisomanassehi gahitasabhāvena tuṭṭhapahaṭṭhena udaggudaggena. Appamādoti appamajjanaṃ kusaladhammesu akhaṇḍakāritāti āha ‘‘sātaccakiriyā’’ti. Avossaggoti cittassa kāmaguṇesu avossajjanaṃ pakkhandituṃ appadānaṃ. Purimo vikappo kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ karaṇavasena dassito, pacchimo akusalānaṃ akaraṇavasena. Dve dhammāti appamādo satīti dve dhammā. Appamādo sati ca tathā pavattā cattāro kusaladhammakkhandhā veditabbā. Kattabbāti pavattetabbā.
在那处所指的是:在被称为涅槃的那个因的证悟中。那个因,就是六处的因。六处在这里灭尽,所以称为六处灭尽,也就是涅槃。因此说“涅槃,就是指这个”等等。在涅槃中:就是在涅槃里。巴利
Tasmiṃ āyataneti tasmiṃ nibbānasaññite kāraṇe paṭivedhe. Taṃ kāraṇanti channaṃ āyatanānaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Saḷāyatanaṃ nirujjhati etthāti saḷāyatananirodho vuccati nibbānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānaṃ. Taṃ sandhāyā’’tiādi. Nibbānasminti nibbānamhi.
5-6. 《帝释问经》等的注释巴利
5-6. Sakkapañhasuttādivaṇṇanā
118-119 “所见”是指眼前显现的。“法”是指取蕴之法。因为在这里,生起“我”的想和见,就是有身的想,所以说“于现法”就是在自己这个有身之中。“依彼”中的“彼”字,是指前面用欢喜等说法所表达的渴爱被执取,所以说“依渴爱”。“彼执取”就是此渴爱的执取。这渴爱和执取合称为执取,就是“彼执取”。第六项因为第五项已经说明了道理,所以它的含义很清楚。巴利
118-119.Diṭṭheti paccakkhabhūte. Dhammeti upādānakkhandhadhamme. Tattha hi attāti bhavati saññā diṭṭhi cāti attabhāvasaññā. Tenāha – ‘‘diṭṭhevadhammeti imasmiṃyeva attabhāve’’ti. ‘‘Tannissita’’nti ettha taṃ-saddena heṭṭhā abhinandanādipariyāyena vuttā taṇhā paccāmaṭṭhāti āha – ‘‘taṇhānissita’’nti. Taṃ upādānaṃ etassāti tadupādānaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘taṃgahaṇa’’ntiādi. Taṇhupādānasaṅkhātaṃ gahaṇaṃ etassāti taṃgahaṇaṃ. Chaṭṭhaṃ uttānameva pañcame vuttanayattā.
第7篇 舍利弗同住弟子经的注释巴利
7. Sāriputtasaddhivihārikasuttavaṇṇanā
120 “将会连接”是指将会建立前后相续的关联。“断绝”是指由于与梵行相违的诸缘生起而导致中断。巴利
120.Ghaṭessatīti pubbenāparaṃ ghaṭitaṃ sambandhaṃ karissati. Vicchedanti brahmacariyassa virodhipaccayasamuppattiyā ucchedaṃ.
5. 教诫罗睺罗经注巴利
8. Rāhulovādasuttavaṇṇanā
121 121. 那些被正确修习、反复修习之后,能导向解脱、能导向证悟阿罗汉果的法,指的就是信等资粮,它们是使解脱成熟的因素。“使成熟”的意思是令其达到成熟、达到转变。“法”指的是作为原因的法。“依清净因之力”即依作为清净之因的力量;而这里的清净,是从信根等作为因的角度来说的。就像出身高贵的刹帝利少年,因为远离敌对一方、摄受亲族一方,以及所处环境的圆满而变得清净,应当这样来理解。为了说明这一点,论师说了“因此已说”等话。巴利
121. Ye dhammā sammadeva bhāvitā bahulīkatā vimuttiyā arahattassa sacchikiriyāya saṃvattanti, te saddhādayo sambhārā vimuttiparipācaniyāti adhippetā. Paripācentīti paripākaṃ pariṇāmaṃ gamenti. Dhammāti kāraṇabhūtā dhammā. Visuddhikāraṇavasenāti visuddhikāraṇatāvasena, sā pana saddhindriyādīnaṃ kāraṇato visuddhi. Yathā nāma jātisampannassa khattiyakumārassa vipakkhavigamena pakkhasaṅgahena pavattiṭṭhānasampattiyā ca parisuddhi hoti, evamevaṃ daṭṭhabbāti dassento ‘‘vuttaṃ heta’’ntiādimāha.
没有信心等的人,只会导致信心等的退失;而具足信心等的人,则唯能使信心等圆满。同样地,对能引发净信的经典等的反复观察也是如此。所谓“能引发净信的经典”,就是指《能引发净信经》等。“正勤”指《正勤经》。“念处”指四念处。“禅那与解脱”指宣说禅那与解脱的经典。“甚深智行”指与蕴、处、界、缘起相关的经典。巴利
Assaddhādayopi puggalā saddhādīnaṃ yāvadeva parihānāya honti, saddhādayo pāripūriyāva, tathā pasādaniyasuttantādipaccavekkhaṇā, pasādaniyasuttantā nāma sampasādanīyasuttādayo. Sammappadhāneti sammappadhānasuttante. Satipaṭṭhāneti cattāro satipaṭṭhāne. Jhānavimokkheti jhānāni ceva vimokkhe ca uddissa pavattasuttante. Gambhīrañāṇacariyeti khandhāyatanadhātupaṭiccasamuppādapaṭisaṃyuttasuttante.
善知识等,是指善知识、戒防护、减损谈论、精进努力、决择慧这五种法,就是《自说经》(Ud. 31)里说的“弥醯,在这里,比丘有善知识”等等所说的那些。观察世间,是指世尊看见具寿罗睺罗和那些天神的诸根已经成熟。于是,他将前往盲林,因为在那里日间安住时会有大集会。经中确实会这样说:“所谓‘若干’,按计算是没有界限的。”巴利
Kalyāṇamittatādayoti kalyāṇamittatā sīlasaṃvaro abhisallekhakathā vīriyārambho nibbedhikapaññāti ime kalyāṇamittādayo pañca dhammā, ye ‘‘idha, meghiya, bhikkhu kalyāṇamitto hotī’’tiādinā udāne (udā. 31) kathitā. Lokaṃ volokentassāti āyasmato rāhulassa tāsañca devatānaṃ indriyaparipākaṃ passantassa. Tato yena andhavanaṃ, tattha divāvihārāya mahāsamāgamo bhavissatīti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘ettakāti gaṇanāvasena paricchedo natthī’’ti.
依靠树木和山而住在地面上的,是地居;在虚空中行走、住在宫殿里的,是空居。法眼应当理解为:以见四圣谛之法的意义来说。巴利
Rukkhapabbatanissitā bhūmaṭṭhakā, ākāsacārivimānavāsino antalikkhaṭṭhakā. Dhammacakkhunti veditabbāni catusaccadhammānaṃ dassanaṭṭhena.
第十三 居士品巴利
13. Gahapativaggo
1-3. 《毗舍离经》等的注释巴利
1-3. Vesālīsuttādivaṇṇanā
124-126 “于二”指的是:在居士品中,第一、第二和第三经里所说的内容,只是经文本身的读法不同,并没有新的含义。巴利
124-126.Dvīsūti imasmiṃ gahapativagge paṭhamadutiyesu tatiye ca vuttatthameva pāṭhajātaṃ apubbaṃ natthīti attho.
4-5. 《婆罗堕阇经》等的注释巴利
4-5. Bhāradvājasuttādivaṇṇanā
127-128 确实,其他出家人也会在适当的时候托着钵到处乞食,但这个人却是个肚饱的家伙。为了说明他正是因为这个原因才出家,所以经文说“托着钵”等等。“摩擦着放”是指把钵在地上摩擦着放下。“已尽”是指从四面八方彻底用尽。葫芦钵等……已出现,是因为禁止放置多余的钵,所以他不接受别的钵。有人说,“根修习”是指眼等五根的修习,意思是:在专注于观之后,再增长更上层的观。另一些人则说:“以信等五根的力量专注于观,借着那种快乐,成就神通和断除,这样来修习根。”巴利
127-128. Kāmaṃ aññepi pabbajitā yuttakāle piṇḍaṃ ulamānā carantiyeva, ayaṃ pana odarito, teneva kāraṇena pabbajitoti dassento ‘‘piṇḍaṃ ulamāno’’tiādimāha. Ghaṃsantovāti bhūmiyaṃ ghaṃsanto eva pattaṃ ṭhapeti. Parikkhīṇanti samantato parikkhīṇaṃ. Nāḷiko …pe… jātaṃ, atirekapattaṭṭhapanassa paṭikkhittattā aññaṃ na gaṇhāti. ‘‘Indriyabhāvananti cakkhādipañcindriyabhāvana’’nti keci vadanti, tathā vipassanābhinivesaṃ katvā uparivipassanaṃ vaḍḍhitvāti adhippāyo. Apare pana ‘‘saddhāpañcamānaṃ indriyānaṃ vasena vipassanābhinivesaṃ katvā tena sukhena abhiññāpahānānaṃ sampādanavasena indriyaṃ bhāvetvā’’ti vadanti.
“近前”在这里,为了说明那位国王是怎样近前的,从他一到来就开始展示,于是说“据说长老……”等。“大饮”是指不做别的业,一味耽溺于饮酒,七天里与相应的随从饮酒。因此说“喝了所谓大饮”。“用红稻壳”是指用红色的稻壳。“像被烧着一样”是指被蚂蚁咬等所产生的苦受。“用口矛刺”是因为宠爱,因为那位国王贪恋女人。巴利
Upasaṅkamatīti ettha yathā so rājā upasaṅkami, taṃ āgamanato paṭṭhāya dassetuṃ ‘‘thero kirā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Mahāpānaṃ nāma aññaṃ kammaṃ akatvā pānapasuto hutvā sattāhaṃ tadanurūpaparijanassa surāpivanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘mahāpānaṃ nāma pivitvā’’ti. Sālithusehīti rattasālithusehi. Ḍayhamānaṃ viya kipillikadaṃsanajātāhi dukkhavedanāhi. Mukhasattīhi vijjhiṃsu vallabhatāya. Itthilolo hi so rājā.
传承:指他们所受持的传承,也就是梵行的相续。令行:就是令实践、令成就。重所缘:指应当尊重、不可违越的所缘,这就是它的意思。他的:指国王的。心不入:指心不进入、不趋入信解之道。恼害:指逼迫。巴利
Paveṇinti tesaṃ samādānapaveṇiṃ brahmacariyapabandhaṃ. Paṭipādentīti sampādenti. Garukārammaṇanti garukātabbaārammaṇaṃ, avītikkamitabbārammaṇanti attho. Assāti rañño. Cittaṃ anotarantanti pasādavīthiṃ anotarantaṃ anupagacchantaṃ. Viheṭhetunti vibādhituṃ.
贪法之所以用复数形式说成“贪法”,是因为贪一次又一次地生起。这里的意思也就是“生起”:因为正在生起的贪法在摄持自己的因缘时,就像在让人知道它一样,能够持续地运转起来。关于“即此身”这一句,“身”这个词在这里就是“聚集”的意思,因为它指向的是在子宫等处生起的诸法的聚集;而其他那些则应理解为以身体为标志,所以称为“身”。这一点很清楚,因为下面的说法方式已经说明了。巴利
Lobhassa aparāparuppattiyā bahuvacanavasena ‘‘lobhadhammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Uppajjantītipi attho yeva, yasmā uppajjamāno lobhadhammo attano hetupaccaye pariggahāpento jānāpento viya sahati pavattatīti. Imameva kāyanti ettha samūhatthe eva kāya-saddo gabbhāsayādiṭṭhānesu uppajjanadhammasamūhavisayattā, itare pana kāyūpalakkhitatāya ‘‘kāyo’’ti veditabbā. Uttānameva heṭṭhā vuttanayattā.
《瞿师罗经》的注释巴利
6. Ghositasuttavaṇṇanā
129 “悦意的色”是指青等不同种类的色法,以及以心而悦意、令人欢喜的色法存在;这是为了显示乐受触的自性。同样,在“悦意的色,是舍受所缘”等处,也应当按各自情况说明。“眼识……触”是这样说的。因为与眼识相应的触,是从亲依止缘的角度而成为乐受,不是从俱生缘的角度。因此说:“依一个触,由速行之力而生起乐受。”其余诸句,则是在“居士,确实有耳界……”等所说的五个部分中。巴利
129.Rūpā ca manāpāti nīlādibhedā rūpadhammā ca manasā manuññā piyarūpā saṃvijjanti, idañca sukhavedanīyassa phassassa sabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘rūpā ca manāpā upekkhāvedaniyā’’ti etthāpi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ. Cakkhuviññāṇa…pe… phassanti vuttaṃ. Upanissayakoṭiyā hi cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttaphasso sukhavedanīyo, na sahajātakoṭiyā. Tenāha – ‘‘ekaṃ phassaṃ paṭicca javanavasena sukhavedanā uppajjatī’’ti. Sesapadesūti ‘‘saṃvijjati kho, gahapati, sotadhātū’’ti āgatesu pañcasu koṭṭhāsesu.
二十三种界,是依六门分别而说的。「依于所依处」:就是依止于心脏所依处。在五门中有二十种,在意门中有三种,这样就是二十三种。巴利
Tevīsatidhātuyo kathitā channaṃ dvārānaṃ vasena vibhajjagahaṇena. Vatthunissitanti hadayavatthunissitaṃ. Pañcadvāre vīsati, manodvāre tisso evaṃ tevīsati.
7-8. 《诃梨提迦尼经》等的注释巴利
7-8. Hāliddikānisuttādivaṇṇanā
130-131 130-131.“它就是如此”的意思是:通过眼睛看到的色,就是“它就是如此”。所谓“缘乐受者”,是指作为乐受的亲依止缘而成为缘的眼识,以及那个触——它按各自的情况,或者作为亲依止缘,或者作为无间缘,或者作为俱生缘和相应缘,成为乐受的缘。依于那个缘乐受的触,乐受生起——这是句子的连接。这个道理也适用于其余七个转起中的每一个。或者,按阿毗达摩的方式说,它就是与意界相同;但按经的方式说,因为空、无众生、无命我的意义,它同样获得“意界”这个名称。第八个转起本身就很清楚,因为道理已如前面所说。巴利
130-131.Taṃitthetanti cakkhunā yaṃ rūpaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, taṃ itthanti attho. Taṃ sukhavedaniyanti taṃ sukhavedanāya upanissayakoṭiyā paccayabhūtaṃ cakkhuviññāṇañceva, yo ca yathārahaṃ upanissayakoṭiyā vā, anantaro ce anantarakoṭiyā vā, sahajāto ce sampayuttakoṭiyā vā, sukhavedanāya paccayo phasso. Taṃ sukhavedaniyañca phassaṃ paṭicca uppajjati sukhavedanāti yojanā. Esa nayo sabbattha sabbesu sesesu sattasu vāresu. Manodhātuyeva vā samānāti abhidhammanayena. Suttantanayena pana suññataṭṭhena nissattanijjīvaṭṭhena ca manodhātusamaññaṃ labhateva. Aṭṭhamaṃ uttānameva heṭṭhā vuttanayattā.
第9章《露遮经》的注释巴利
9. Lohiccasuttavaṇṇanā
132 他们也被称为“年轻人”而已,并非只是被称为婆罗门族的青年。“Seleyyakāni”是指互相黏在一起、跳跃跨越的嬉戏。巴利
132.Tepi māṇavakātveva vuttā, na brāhmaṇakumārā eva. Seleyyakānīti aññamaññaṃ silissanalaṅghanakīḷanāni.
因为随侍在旁而搬运象的,叫“ibbhā”,也就是管象的人。不过,他们因为依靠微贱之家的受用,又具有居士的身份,所以也被称为“居士”,因此说“居士”。“Kaṇhā”就是黑种姓的人。“维持国土”是说:他们住在哪个国土,就通过向那个国土缴纳赋税,或者通过维持自己的家业来维持生活。“游行者”是说他们四处走动,到处玩耍。巴利
Upaṭṭhānavasena ibhaṃ harantīti ibbhā, hatthigopakā. Te pana nihīnakuṭumbassa bhoggaṃ upādāya gahapatibhāvaṃ upādāya ‘‘gahapatikā’’tipi vuccantīti āha ‘‘gahapatikā’’ti. Kaṇhāti kaṇhābhijātikā. Raṭṭhaṃ bharantīti yasmiṃ raṭṭhe vasanti, tassa raṭṭhassa baliṃ bharaṇena, attano vā kuṭumbassa bharaṇena bharatā. Pariyāyantāti parito saṃcarantā kīḷanti.
以戒为尊,就是以戒为首要。那些能忆念古法的人,就是过去戒行最殊胜的人。诸门,就是眼等感官之门。巴利
Sīlajeṭṭhakāti sīlappadhānā. Ye purāṇaṃ saranti, te sīluttamā ahesuṃ. Dvārāni cakkhādidvārāni.
离开之后,已经离去、脱离、别去。不平坦的,就是失去了平坦,具有恶行的性质。种种杖罚,就是种种棍棒的击打。巴利
Apakkamitvā apetā virahitā hutvā. Visamānīti vigatasamāni duccaritasabhāvāni. Nānāvidhadaṇḍā nānāvidhadaṇḍanipātā.
不进食者,就是完全不吃任何东西的人。就像泥沼里的泥一样,那是污垢。牙齿的泥垢,因为前一个词被省略,就只说成泥,所以说泥就是齿垢。以山羊所应做的方式去做,不加以扰动,这是以受持誓愿的方式来实践。这个道理在其余各项上也同样适用。所谓欺诈,就是掩盖自己身上确实存在的过失,却宣扬实际上并不具备的功德,因此说覆藏……以及欺诈。资具器物之释,就是适宜的资具器物。而那些器物是为自己的生计,为了用利养把别人系缚住、绑在自己身边、不让他们解脱,才被做成的。巴利
Anāhārakāti kiñci abhuñjanakā. Paṅko viya paṅko, malaṃ. Dantapaṅko purimapadalopena paṅkoti vuttoti ‘‘paṅko nāma dantamala’’nti vuttaṃ. Ajehi kātabbakānaṃ akopetvā karaṇaṃ samādānavasena vataṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Kohaññaṃ nāma attani vijjamānadosaṃ paṭicchādetvā asantaguṇapakāsanāti āha – ‘‘paṭicchanna…pe… kohaññañcevā’’ti. Parikkhārabhaṇḍakavaṇṇāti parikkhārabhaṇḍā kappakāti. Te ca kho attano jīvikatthāya āmisakiñjakkhassa attanibandhanatthāya amocanatthāya katā.
所谓无硬结,即依梵住而远离心的硬结。因此说“柔软而不僵硬”。巴利
Akhilanti cetokhilarahitaṃ brahmavihāravasena. Tenāha ‘‘mudu athaddha’’nti.
倾向:因为喜爱而投入专注。心狭小:心从各方面都被割裂、破碎。心无量:在这里,是能够拒绝“这是谁”这种念头的心。巴利
Adhimuttoti abhirativasena yuttapayutto. Parittacittoti parito khaṇḍitacitto. Appamāṇacittoti ettha ‘‘ko aya’’nti paṭikkhituṃ sakkuṇeyyacitto.
10. 《韦拉哈遮尼经》的注释巴利
10. Verahaccānisuttavaṇṇanā
133 年轻人为了催那位婆罗门女去听法,说道“yagghe”。所以注释里说:“yagghe 是一个表示催促意思的虚词。”巴利
133. Brāhmaṇiṃ dhammasavanāya codento māṇavako ‘‘yagghe’’ti avoca. Tenāha ‘‘yaggheti codanatthe nipāto’’ti.
14. 天臂品巴利
14. Devadahavaggo
1. 《天臂经》的注释巴利
1. Devadahasuttavaṇṇanā
134 让心欢喜:指当对象出现在心中时,以令心欢喜、让人觉得可爱的方式生起。巴利
134.Manaṃ ramayantāti āpāthagatā manassa ramaṇavasena piyāyitabbatāvasena pavattantā.
2. 《刹那经》的注释巴利
2. Khaṇasuttavaṇṇanā
135 “六触处”:就是由六种触处所感受到的不可意境。“六门触了别”:通过六门对所缘的了别,其目的完全就是为了领受痛苦。“三十三天城”:就是善见大城。所谓“不存在”的情况根本不会有,因为一切时候都在领受快乐。“地狱”:这里用恶趣存在的共性,把其他恶道也都包括进去了。“无法安住于道梵行住”:从这里可以看出,这里也把一切中断修行的处境都包含在内了。“唯此”:就是仅在这个人界。恶趣也显现,因为有时会感受到类似恶趣的痛苦;天界也显现,因为有时能获得类似天界享乐的成就。巴利
135.Chaphassāyatanikāti chahi phassāyatanehi aniṭṭhasaṃvedaniyā. Chadvāraphassapaṭiviññattīti chahipi dvārehi ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃvedanā hotiyeva sabbaso dukkhānubhavanatthaṃ. Tāvatiṃsapuranti sudassanamahānagaraṃ. Abhāvo nāma natthi sabbathā sukhānubhavanato. Nirayeti iminā duggati bhavasāmaññena itarāpāyāpi gahitā eva. Maggabrahmacariyavāsaṃ vasituṃ na sakkāti iminā pana sabbesampi acchindikaṭṭhānānaṃ gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imevāti imasmiṃ manussaloke eva. Apāyopi paññāyati apāyadukkhasadisassa dukkhassa kadāci paṭisaṃvedanato. Saggopi paññāyati devabhogasadisasampattiyā kadāci paṭilabhitabbato.
这个人间世界就是业地,因为它是适合造作人力、造业的地方,所以叫做业地。在这里,为了指出最主要的业,就说“在此修习道”。“处”就是原因。“令人悚惧的事”就是能引生悚惧的许多事,比如生等。确实,生、老、病、死,堕入恶趣,其中又有导致投生地狱的因、导致投生畜生的因、导致投生阿修罗的因,过去轮回的根源、未来轮回的根源、现在为觅食而奔波的根源——这样观察许多令人悚惧的事之后,已经生起悚惧、已经激发起悚惧的人,你应当如理地精勤努力。“悚惧”就是令悚惧生起。巴利
Ayaṃ kammabhūmīti ayaṃ manussaloko purisathāmakaraṇāya kammabhūmi nāma tāsaṃ yogyaṭṭhānabhāvato. Tattha padhānakammaṃ dassento ‘‘idha maggabhāvanā’’ti āha. Ṭhānānīti kāraṇāni. Saṃvejaniyānīti saṃvegajananāni bahūni jātiādīni. Tathā hi jāti, jarā, byādhi, maraṇaṃ, apāyabhavaṃ, tatthapi nirayūpapattihetukaṃ, tiracchānupapattihetukaṃ, asūrakāyūpapattihetukaṃ, atīte vaṭṭamūlakaṃ, anāgate vaṭṭamūlakaṃ, paccuppanne āhārapariyeṭṭhimūlakanti bahūni saṃvegavatthūni paccavekkhitvā saṃvegajāto sañjātasaṃvego yoniso padhānamanuyuñjassu. Saṃvegāti saṃvegamāpajjassu.
《第一色欢喜经》注释巴利
3. Paṭhamarūpārāmasuttavaṇṇanā
136 136. 满心欢喜、达到和悦、极度欢喜、生起极大喜悦。“苦”:指有苦的人、已生起苦的人。因此说“苦者”。“此人有乐”,所以是乐者、有乐者。因此说“有乐者”。世间存在的色等诸法,就称为“世间”。“观见者”:指通过证悟真理而正确观见的人。说了“是相反的”之后,为了显示那种相反性,接着说了“世间确实……”等内容。“不净”要与“称为”一词连起来理解。“这全部”:前面所说“乐为圣者们所见……中略……那些圣者知其为乐”等,这一切都是针对涅槃而说的。因为唯有涅槃才是绝对意义上的乐。巴利
136.Sammuditā sammodappattā, pamoditā sañjātapamodā. Dukkhāti dukkhavanto sañjātadukkhā. Tenāha ‘‘dukkhitā’’ti. Sukhaṃ etassa atthīti sukho, sukhī. Tenāha ‘‘sukhito’’ti. Yattakā rūpādayo dhammā loke atthīti vuccati. Passantānanti saccapaṭivedhena sammadeva passantānaṃ. ‘‘Paccanīkaṃ hotī’’ti vatvā taṃ paccanīkabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘loko hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asubhāti ‘‘āhū’’tipadaṃ ānetvā sambandho. Sabbametanti ‘‘sukhaṃ diṭṭhamariyebhi…pe… tadariyā sukhato vidū’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Sabbametaṃ nibbānameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Nibbānameva hi ekantato sukhaṃ nāma.
九十五种外道以及他们的外道性,在《破迷论注释》里已经讲明了。“被烦恼盖所覆”是指:烦恼蕴就是烦恼盖,被它障碍的人就是被烦恼盖所覆。“涅槃见”就是圣道,通过它证悟涅槃,而涅槃就像被乌云遮住的月轮一样。巴利
Pañcanavutipāsaṇḍino tesañca pāsaṇḍibhāvo papañcasūdaniṭṭhakathāyaṃ pakāsito eva. Kilesanīvaraṇena nivutānanti kilesakhandhā kilesanīvaraṇaṃ, tena nivāritānaṃ. Nibbānadassanaṃ nāma ariyamaggo, tena tassa paṭivijjhanañca kāḷameghaavacchāditaṃ viya candamaṇḍalaṃ.
通过不净的界定和正智正见来限定之后。道法:指圣道之法。巴利
Paricchinditvāti asubhabhāvaparicchindanena sammāviññāṇadassanena ca paricchinditvā. Maggadhammassāti ariyamaggadhammassa.
“随行者”是指那些紧跟着、不离开正道而修行的人。这是在说明:还有谁能了知呢?别人是不知道的。巴利
Anupannehīti anu anu avihāya paṭipannehi. Ko nu añño jānituṃ arahati, añño na jānātīti dasseti.
4-12. 《第二色欢喜经》等经的注释巴利
4-12. Dutiyarūpārāmasuttādivaṇṇanā
137-145 137-145. 只取纯粹的经文本身,不采用偈颂的形式,仅仅以散文句的方式来处理。所谓“以各种方式”,就是把内处和外处,配合无常相、苦相、无我相,从观察的角度来显示。巴利
137-145.Suddhikaṃ katvā gāthābandhanena vinā kevalaṃ cuṇṇiyapadavaseneva. Tathā tathāti ajjhattikāni bāhirāni ca āyatanāni aniccalakkhaṇena dukkhānattalakkhaṇehi ca yojetvā dassanavasena.
第十五 新旧品巴利
15. Navapurāṇavaggo
《业灭经》的注释巴利
1. Kammanirodhasuttavaṇṇanā
146 146. 现在,因为当前存在的眼和引生这眼的业才是这里所指的,所以先说“眼不是旧的,只有业才是旧的”,然后说明这眼在什么意义上可以称为“旧的”,接着就说“然而从业的角度”等等。“以缘的名称”:因为业在前世就已成就,作为缘的业应当被称为“旧的”,也就是用作为缘的业的名称来称呼。“如此所说”:就是像这样说的“旧业”。“与诸缘会合而造作”:指与渴爱、无明等诸缘面对面地会合、聚集而产生。“以思”:指以业的思。“所策划的”:指所积聚的。“以受”:指依止自己而取所缘后生起的受。“处”:生起之因、住立之处,应以观慧照见。“以业的灭尽”:指以烦恼的不再生起灭尽所成就的业的灭尽。“触证解脱”:证得阿拉汉果的解脱。作为所缘的灭尽、涅槃,被称为“业的灭尽”,因为作“业在此灭尽”之故。由于说“诸比库,你们要修禅,不要放逸”,所以说“说了前分观”。巴利
146. Sampati vijjamānassa cakkhussa taṃnibbattassa kammassa ca adhippetattā ‘‘na cakkhu purāṇaṃ, kammameva purāṇa’’nti vatvā yathā tassa cakkhussa purāṇapariyāyo vutto, taṃ dassento āha – ‘‘kammato panā’’tiādi. Paccayanāmenāti purimajātisaṃsiddhattā ‘‘purāṇa’’nti vattabbassa paccayabhūtassa kammassa nāmena. Evaṃ vuttanti ‘‘purāṇakamma’’nti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Paccayehi abhisamāgantvā katanti taṇhāvijjādipaccayehi abhimukhabhāvena samāgantvā samecca nibbattitaṃ. Cetanāyāti kammacetanāya. Pakappitanti abhisamīhitaṃ. Vedanāyāti attānaṃ nissāya ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattāya vedanāya. Vatthūti nibbattikāraṇaṃ pavattaṭṭhānanti vipassanāpaññāya passitabbaṃ. Kammassa nirodhenāti kilesānaṃ anuppādanirodhasiddhena kammassa nirodhena. Vimuttiṃ phusatīti arahattaphalavimuttiṃ pāpuṇāti. Ārammaṇabhūto nirodho nibbānaṃ ‘‘kammanirodho’’ti vuccati, ‘‘kammaṃ nirujjhati etthā’’ti katvā. ‘‘Jhāyatha, bhikkhave, mā pamādatthā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘pubbabhāgavipassanā kathitā’’ti vuttaṃ.
2-5. 《无常经》《适合涅槃经》等经的注释巴利
2-5. Aniccanibbānasappāyasuttādivaṇṇanā
147-150 “涅槃的”:指证得涅槃,或者就是指烦恼的涅槃。“有帮助的修行”:指能带来利益的修行。“在四者中”:指在第二等四者当中。因为开示了随顺涅槃的修行,所以就说“连同观,四道已经被宣说”。巴利
147-150.Nibbānassāti nibbānādhigamassa, kilesanibbānasseva vā. Upakārapaṭipadanti upakārāvahaṃ paṭipadaṃ. Catūsūti dutiyādīsu catūsu. Nibbānasappāyā paṭipadā desitāti katvā ‘‘saha vipassanāya cattāro maggā kathitā’’ti vuttaṃ.
第6到第7节《弟子经》等的注释巴利
6-7. Antevāsikasuttādivaṇṇanā
151-152 151-152. “边”(anta)这个词用在表示“附近”的意思上,比如“水边”“林边”这类说法里。而烦恼住在离内心极近的地方,因为它是在内部活动的,所以被称为“学童”(antevāsika),这是通过省略格变化构成的,就像“林中善巧者”“岸树”那样。因此他说:“无学童者”就是指远离了住在内部的烦恼的人。“远离现行烦恼者”意思是远离了实际浮现出来的烦恼。它们住在里面,就是说它们住在这个人的内心之中、在内心生起、活动。那些压制此者,就是说那些烦恼征服了这个人之后,让他随自己的支配而转。因此他说:“也就是压倒,或是教诫。”那些老师,就是指那些被称为烦恼的、把众生安置在自己趣向中的老师。第七项和下面所说的方法是一样的,因为下面是以蕴的方式来做开示,而这里是以处的方式来做开示,这就是唯一的不同。巴利
151-152. Anta-saddo samīpatthe vattati ‘‘udakantaṃ vananta’’ntiādīsu, kileso pana atiāsanne vasati abbhantaravuttitāyāti ‘‘antevāsika’’nti vutto vibhattialopena yathā ‘‘vanekusalo, kūlerukkhā’’ti. Tenāha – ‘‘anantevāsikanti antovasanakilesavirahita’’nti. Ācaraṇakakilesavirahitanti samudācaraṇakilesarahitaṃ. Antoassa vasantīti assa puggalassa anto abbhantare citte vasanti pavattanti. Te etaṃ adhibhavantīti te kilesā etaṃ puggalaṃ abhibhavitvā attano vase vattenti. Tenāha – ‘‘ajjhottharanti sikkhāpenti vā’’ti. Tehi ācariyehīti tehi kilesasaṅkhātehi satte attano gatiyaṃ ṭhapentehi ācariyehi. Sattamaṃ heṭṭhā kathitanayamevāti yasmā heṭṭhā khandhavasena desanā āgatā, idha āyatanavasenāti ayameva viseso.
《有因缘经》的注释巴利
8. Atthinukhopariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
153 153. 因为能周遍、能遍及,所以是它的因,因此“pariyāya”就是因,所以他说:“所谓pariyāya,就是原因。”对于现前所见、没有颠倒的意义而生起的信,就是现前信,比如“世尊是正自觉者,法是善说”。像这样,据说依“据说如此”而生起的信,只是信的模样。这指的是“除了信之外”这句话。令喜欢:以自己的判断喜欢某个意义。令堪忍是它的同义词,就是让心那样堪忍。因此他说:“这就是执取的方式。”对于传来之义,这样听说,就是传闻。对于正在思维原因的人,即正在思维合理性的人,因对于自心显现为“善哉”的样态,这就是原因现前;以心执取“这个原因如此,这个意义如此合理”,就是执取方式;合理的构想,就是理审察;确定地执取,而这本身就是见,但由于是不如实的执取,故知唯是无明,这就是执见;此执见于我中生起、存在,以与理相应、合理的方式可得,这就是此义;这样执取的方式就是见审察堪忍,依最初生起的执见而称为见的审察、堪忍方式,就是见审察堪忍;如前所说的信等五种原因,就是五处。舍离、不执取。依下道所断的贪等不存在,而说“我内无贪嗔痴”,这是有学的省察;依完全不存在,而说无学的,因此他说:“有学、无学的省察已说。”依“内有寂静”等语,说有学的省察;依“内有不寂静”等语,说无学的省察,应当如此理解。巴利
153. Pariyāyati parigacchati phalaṃ etassāti pariyāyo hetūti āha – ‘‘yaṃ pariyāyanti yaṃ kāraṇa’’nti. Paccakkhadiṭṭhe aviparīte atthe pavattasaddhā paccakkhasaddhā yathā ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākhāto dhammo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.288) ca. Evaṃ kirāti iti kirāya uppanno saddahanākāro saddhāpatirūpako. Etanti ‘‘aññatreva saddhāyā’’ti etaṃ vacanaṃ . Rucāpetvāti kiñci atthaṃ attano matiyā rocetvā. Khamāpetvāti tasseva vevacanaṃ, cittaṃ tathā khamāpetvā. Tenāha – ‘‘atthetanti gahaṇākāro’’ti. Paramparāgatassa atthassa evaṃ kirassāti anussavanaṃ. Kāraṇaṃ cintentassāti yuttiṃ cintentassa. Kāraṇaṃ upaṭṭhātīti ‘‘sādhū’’ti attano cittassa upatiṭṭhati. Atthetanti ‘‘etaṃ kāraṇaṃ evamayamattho yujjatī’’ti cittena gahaṇaṃ. Ākāraparivitakkoti yuttiparikappanā. Laddhīti nicchayena gahaṇaṃ, sā ca kho diṭṭhi ayāthāvaggahaṇena aññāṇamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tanti laddhiṃ. Atthesāti esā laddhi mama uppannā atthi yuttarūpā hutvā upalabbhati. Evaṃ gahaṇākāro diṭṭhinijjhānakkhanti nāma, paṭhamuppannaladdhisaṅkhātāya diṭṭhiyā nijjhānaṃ khamanākāro diṭṭhinijjhānakkhanti nāma. Pañca ṭhānānīti yathāvuttāni saddhādīni pañca kāraṇāni. Muñcitvā aggahetvā. Heṭṭhimamaggavajjhānaṃ rāgādīnaṃ abhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘natthi me ajjhattaṃ rāgadosamoho’’ti ayaṃ sekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā, sabbaso abhāvaṃ sandhāya asekkhānanti āha – ‘‘sekkhāsekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā kathitā’’ti. ‘‘Santaṃ vā ajjhatta’’ntiādinā sekkhānaṃ, ‘‘asantaṃ vā ajjhatta’’ntiādinā asekkhānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā kathitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
9-10. 《根具足经》等的注释巴利
9-10. Indriyasampannasuttādivaṇṇanā
154-155 154-155. 就像“比丘们,你们要具足戒而安住”等经文里那样,这里“sampanna”(具足)一词的意思是“圆满”,所以注释说“根圆满”。因为具足诸根,所以叫“根圆满”,这就是两者的关联。如果只是这样,那就等于在说“具足的成就”,为了回应这个疑问,注释又说“或者指眼等”。所谓“关于这个”,是指后一种解释所说的意思。前面在蕴品里是按蕴来开示的,而这里按处来开示,所以说“就是前面说过的方式”。巴利
154-155. ‘‘Sampannasīlā, bhikkhave, viharathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.64) viya paripuṇṇattho idha sampanna-saddoti āha ‘‘paripuṇṇindriyo’’ti. Indriyehi samannāgatattā paripuṇṇindriyo nāma hotīti sambandho. Evaṃ sati samannāgamasampatti vuttā hotīti āsaṅkanto ‘‘cakkhādīni vā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ sandhāyāti dutiyavikappena vuttamatthaṃ sandhāya. Heṭṭhā khandhiyavagge khandhavasena desanā āgatā, idha āyatanavasenāti āha ‘‘vuttanayamevā’’ti.
爱尽品巴利
16. Nandikkhayavaggo
《内喜尽经》等的注释巴利
1-4. Ajjhattanandikkhayasuttādivaṇṇanā
156-159 “义”是指从自性上来说。通过智慧、作为圣者所应知的对象,这就是义,也就是自性。因为这样,具有贪欲自性的事物,以令人喜悦的意义称为“喜”,以染着的意义称为“贪”。“以解脱之力”是指依证得解脱的力量。“在此”是指在第一经中。“在第二等中”是指在第二、第三、第四经中。这些内容已经很清楚,因为前面已经说过其方法。巴利
156-159.Atthatoti sabhāvato. Ñāṇena ariyato ñātabbato attho, sabhāvoti. Evañhi abhijjanasabhāvo nandanaṭṭhena nandī, rañjanaṭṭhena rāgo. Vimuttivasenāti vimuttiyā adhigamavasena. Etthāti imasmiṃ paṭhamasutte. Dutiyādīsūti dutiyatatiyacatutthesu. Uttānameva heṭṭhā vuttanayattā.
5-6. 耆婆芒果园定经等的解说巴利
5-6. Jīvakambavanasamādhisuttādivaṇṇanā
160-161 160-161. 这是说:定力不足的人正在获得心一境性;远离修习不足的人正在获得身远离和心一境性。所谓“变得明显”,就是变为明显而现前。所谓“沉下”,就是现观;因为这里是就四圣谛之法以明显的方式现前而说的,所以说“在两者……中被说”。巴利
160-161. Samādhivikalānaṃ cittekaggataṃ labhantānaṃ, paṭisallānavikalānaṃ kāyavivekañca cittekaggatañca labhantānanti yojanā. Pākaṭaṃ hotīti vibhūtaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti. Okkhāyati paccakkhāyatīti catusaccadhammānaṃ vibhūtabhāvena upaṭṭhānassa kathitattā vuttaṃ – ‘‘dvīsupi…pe… kathitā’’ti.
7-9. 拘絺罗无常经等的注释巴利
7-9. Koṭṭhikaaniccasuttādivaṇṇanā
162-164 无常随观等法本身,就是能令解脱成熟之法。那时,这位长老的信等诸根还没有达到成熟,长老通过这些开示,使诸根达到了成熟。巴利
162-164. Aniccānupassanādayo eva vimuttiparipācaniyā dhammā nāma. Therassa tadā saddhādīni indriyāni na paripākaṃ upagatāni, thero imāhi desanāhi indriyaparipākamagamāsi.
10-12. 《邪见断除经》等经的注释巴利
10-12. Micchādiṭṭhipahānasuttādivaṇṇanā
165-167 165-167.“各别”就是一个个分开来说。“依照前面所说的方式”,是因为没有新的内容需要说明,所以还是依照前面所说的方式。巴利
165-167.Pāṭiyekkanti visuṃ visuṃ. Vuttanayenevāti heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva apubbassa vattabbassa abhāvā.
六十略品巴利
17. Saṭṭhipeyyālavaggo
1-60. 《内无常意欲经》等经的注释巴利
1-60. Ajjhattaaniccachandasuttādivaṇṇanā
168-227 168-227. “比丘们,凡是无常的,你们对此应当断除欲”——以这样的话开头,根据那些不同人的意乐,宣说了六十部经。而这些经又以重颂的方式进入开示,所以说“名为六十重颂”。因此说道“然而在此中……”等等。巴利
168-227. ‘‘Yaṃ, bhikkhave, aniccaṃ, tatra vo chando pahātabbo’’tiādinā tesaṃ tesaṃ puggalānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena saṭṭhi suttāni kathitāni , tāni ca peyyālanayena desanaṃ āruḷhānīti ‘‘saṭṭhipeyyālo nāma hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yāni panetthā’’tiādi.
第十八 大海品巴利
18. Samuddavaggo
第一大海经的注释巴利
1. Paṭhamasamuddasuttavaṇṇanā
228 228. 如果因为“难以填满”和“汇入”这两层含义,海洋才被称为“海”,那么为了说明这两层含义无例外地只适用于眼,才说了“如果”等话。其中,“难以填满”是指无法填满的状态。“汇入”是指完全不断地向上涌进。因为即使恒河等大河的巨大水流年复一年地不断涌入,大海也不会因此被填满;而海水所淹没的地方,并不会因此就变成海洋,一旦海水退去,那地方就不复存在,或者恢复为没有水的状态,并非真的成了海。虽然“难以填满”和“汇入”这两层含义在海洋中也能找到,但为了指出这两者更特别地存在于眼中,所以说了“因为它的”等话。“汇入”是指完全随着青等颜色部分而汇入,也就是进入视野范围的意思。因为难以填满,所以无法满足。由于伴随贪染而行,所以它染污了众生的相续。它的染污性应当通过眼门渴爱来了知。正如海中一波接一波翻腾的波浪之势被称为大海的,同样,在眼海面前,青等不同种类的色所缘一波接一波地翻腾,理应被称为眼的,因为它不与其它事物共通,所以说“色之速行”。不省察是指:在正确所见之色上,执取可爱与不可爱之性,不忆念“我见到了这个那个”,仅仅以整体密集之相而取,这种取就是不省察。“能胜”就是能克服,不因那个所缘而生起任何变异。巴利
228. Yadi ‘‘duppūraṇaṭṭhena samuddanaṭṭhenā’’ti iminā atthadvayena sāgaro ‘‘samuddo’’ti vuccati, cakkhussevetaṃ nippariyāyato yujjatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yadī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha duppūraṇaṭṭhenāti pūretuṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvena. Samuddanaṭṭhenāti sabbaso uparūparipakkhittagamanena. Mahāgaṅgādimahānadīnaṃ mahatā udakoghena anusaṃvaccharaṃ anupakkhandamānopi hi samuddo pāripūriṃ na gacchati, yañca bhūmipadesaṃ ottharati, taṃ samuddabhāvaṃ neti, abhāvaṃ vā pāpuṇāti apayāte samuddodake, taṃ vā anudakabhāvapattiyā atathameva hoti. Kāmañcesa duppūraṇaṭṭho samuddanaṭṭho sāgare labbhati, tathāpi taṃ dvayaṃ cakkhusmiṃyeva visesato labbhatīti dassento ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādimāha. Samosarantanti sabbaso nīlādibhāgehi osarantaṃ, āpāthaṃ āgacchantanti attho. Kātuṃ na sakkoti duppūraṇīyattā. Sadosagamanena gacchati sattasantānassa dussanato. Dussanaṭṭhatā cassa cakkhudvārikataṇhāvasena veditabbā. Yathā samudde aparāparaṃ parivattamāno ūmiyā vego samuddassāti vuccati, evaṃ cakkhusamuddassa purato aparāparaṃ parivattamānaṃ nīlādibhedaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ cakkhussāti vattabbataṃ arahati anaññasādhāraṇattāti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpamayo vego’’ti. Asamapekkhiteti sammādassane rūpe manāpabhāvaṃ amanāpabhāvañca gahetvā, ‘‘idaṃ nāma mayā diṭṭha’’nti anupadhārentassa kevalaṃ samūhaghanavasena gaṇhantassa gahaṇaṃ asamapekkhanaṃ. Sahatīti adhibhavati, taṃnimittaṃ kañci vikāraṃ nāpajjati.
波浪就是水波。漩涡是因旋转而流动的水。擒人罗刹等,就是抓人的罗刹。就像海里的波浪一层接一层地翻涌,把落入其中的人淹没,让他遭遇不幸和灾难一样,漩涡和擒人罗刹也是如此。同样,贪等这些烦恼淹没那些烦恼在自身生起的众生,让他们遭遇不幸和灾难。由于烦恼的生起是众生遭遇不幸和灾难——也就是波浪之怖畏——的所缘,所以眼海被说成是有波浪的、有漩涡的、有擒人罗刹的。巴利
Ūmīti vīciyo. Āvaṭṭo āvaṭṭanavasena pavattaṃ udakaṃ. Gāharakkhasamakarādayo gāharakkhaso. Yathā samudde ūmiyo uparūpari vattamānā attani patitapuggalaṃ ajjhottharitvā anayabyasanaṃ āpādenti, tathā āvaṭṭagāharakkhasā. Evamete rāgādayo kilesā sayaṃ uppannakasatte ajjhottharitvā anayabyasanaṃ āpādenti, kilesuppattinimittatāya sattānaṃ anayabyasanāpattihetubhūtassa ūmibhayassa ārammaṇavasena cakkhusamuddo ‘‘saūmisāvaṭṭo sagāho sarakkhaso’’ti vutto.
“波浪之怖畏”在这里是指:因为对它感到害怕,所以叫怖畏;像波浪一样的怖畏,就是波浪之怖畏。愤怒,是以激动发作为特点。那同样的心,以压迫内心、使之生起的意义来说,以强烈逼迫、极度疲困的意义来说,就是忧恼。这里应当看到,愤怒和忧恼一再生起,淹没众生,让他们连头都抬不起来,造成不幸和灾难,因此和波浪相似。同样,五欲对于被烦恼制伏的众生,就像我慢一样,把他们卷进所谓色等所缘中,使他们流转轮回,以至于对出离这种超出其外的境界,连心都生不起来;这样把他们卷进去、招致灾难,因此应当看到它和漩涡相似。再者,就像擒人罗刹制伏并抓住一个没有守护、进入自己活动范围的男子,即使那人站在自己活动范围之外,也会把他带到自己的范围里,用显现恐怖形象等方式,使他无力自救,然后依附侵入,剥夺他的容貌、力量、财富、寿命和快乐,造成巨大的不幸和灾难;同样,女人也会制伏并抓住一个缺乏如理作意、不是真正有勇气的男子,或者用色相等诱惑把他制伏抓住,或者以女性姿态、妩媚娇态等女人的幻术依附侵入,使他无力成就戒等自身善法,剥夺他的功德、美貌等,造成巨大的不幸和灾难。这样,应当看到女人和擒人罗刹相似。“波浪之怖畏”是相状上的说法。正如波浪以可畏的意义成为怖畏,漩涡和擒人罗刹也是如此;应当知道,以波浪等怖畏为因而有怖畏。到达终点、走到尽头,这样就说为已经到达彼岸涅槃。巴利
Ūmibhayanti ettha bhāyati etasmāti bhayaṃ, ūmīva bhayaṃ ūmibhayaṃ. Kujjhanaṭṭhena kodho. Sveva cittassa ca abhimaddanavasenuppādanatthena daḷhaṃ āyāsanaṭṭhena upāyāso. Ettha ca anekavāraṃ pavattitvā satte ajjhottharitvā sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ adatvā anayabyasananipphādanena kodhūpāyāsassa ūmisadisatā daṭṭhabbā. Tathā kāmaguṇā kilesābhibhūte satte māne viya rūpādivisayasaṅkhāte attani saṃsāretvā yathā tato bahibhūte nekkhamme cittampi na uppajjati, evaṃ āvaṭṭetvā byasanāpādanena āvaṭṭasadisatā daṭṭhabbā. Yadā pana gāharakkhaso ārakkharahitaṃ attano gocarabhūmigataṃ purisaṃ abhibhuyya gahetvā agocare ṭhitampi gocaraṃ netvā bheravarūpadassanādinā attano upakkamaṃ kātuṃ asamatthaṃ katvā anvāvisitvā vaṇṇabalabhogaāyusukhehi viyojetvā mahantaṃ anayabyasanaṃ āpādeti, evaṃ mātugāmopi yonisomanasikārarahitaṃ avīrapurisaṃ attano rūpādīhi palobhanavasena abhibhuyya gahetvā vā vīrajātiyampi itthikuttabhūtehi attano hāvabhāvavilāsehi itthimāyāya anvāvisitvā vā avasaṃ attano upakāradhamme sīlādayo sampādetuṃ asamatthaṃ karonto guṇavaṇṇādīhi viyojetvā mahantaṃ anayabyasanaṃ āpādeti, evaṃ mātugāmassa gāharakkhasasadisatā daṭṭhabbā. Ūmibhayanti lakkhaṇavacanaṃ . Yathā hi ūmi bhāyitabbaṭṭhena bhayaṃ, evaṃ āvaṭṭagāharakkhasāpīti ūmiādibhayena sabhayanti attho veditabbo. Antaṃ avasānaṃ gato, evaṃ pāraṃ nibbānaṃ gatoti vuccati.
第二大海经等的注释巴利
2-3. Dutiyasamuddasuttādivaṇṇanā
229-230 他说“以浸湿之义”,是指引向烦恼被浸湿的状态。圣弟子,指的是不来者。因为他们以欲有的方式未被浸湿,所以不被湿润。三种死亡,指烦恼魔、行魔和天子魔。以三种依,指以烦恼、行和欲乐的三种依。然而,以蕴为依,他并非无依,因为他所证得的只是有余涅槃。“已到达”,是指以行道而到达。巴利
229-230. Kilesānaṃ allabhāvūpanayananti āha ‘‘temanaṭṭhenā’’ti. Ariyasāvaketi anāgāmino. Te hi kāmabhavavasena atintatāya na samunnā. Tayo maccūti kilesābhisaṅkhāradevaputtamāre. Tīhi upadhīhīti kilesābhisaṅkhārakāmaguṇānaṃ vasena tīhi upadhīhi. Khandhupadhinā pana so na nirūpadhi saupādisesasseva nibbānassa adhigatattā. Gatoti paṭipattigamanena gato.
4-6. 乳树譬喻经等的注释巴利
4-6. Khīrarukkhopamasuttādivaṇṇanā
231-233 231-233.“以未断除之义”,是指没有被圣道彻底根除的状态。“存在”,就是有。当因缘具足时,由于能生起存在的功用,所以现起的缠缚烦恼即使很少,也像鼠毒一样,因为力量微弱,就叫做“小”。“如此之类”也是指少量的。“它的”,是指烦恼未断除的。“极强”,是对可爱、可贪染的境界而言,即使因为对象本身很微小,可爱的所缘也会变得极其强烈。因此说“哪怕只有指甲盖那么大”等等。“年轻”等,是三个词。“可击破”,就是能打破。“彼两者”,就是眼与色,也就是这两个处。巴利
231-233.Appahīnaṭṭhenāti maggena asamugghāṭitabhāvena. Atthīti vijjati. Sati paccaye vijjamānakiccakaraṇato pariyuṭṭhānaṃ appakaṃ mūsikāvisaṃ viya parittaṃ nāma hoti appānubhāvattā. Evarūpāpīti appakāpi. Assāti appahīnakilesassa. Adhimattānanti iṭṭhānaṃ rajanīyānaṃ, vatthuvasena parittakampi iṭṭhārammaṇaṃ adhimattameva. Tenāha ‘‘nakhapiṭṭhippamāṇampī’’tiādi. Daharotiādīni tīṇipi padāni. Ābhindeyyāti bhindeyya. Taṃ ubhayanti taṃ cakkhurūpanti ubhayampi āyatanaṃ.
第7篇 优陀夷经的注释巴利
7. Udāyīsuttavaṇṇanā
234 “也是这样”这句话,也是基于这个原因而说的。通过“无常”这一性质,说明了无我的特征。因为识依靠因缘而生起,既然有生起,就必然会有灭去;由于具有生灭的性质,所以识是无常的。如果它真的是“我”,就应该不依赖因缘而能自己成立,然而并不能如此成立。因此,“识是无我”这句话,就是通过无常性来说明无我性。巴利
234.Itipīti imināpi kāraṇena. Aniccenāti aniccabhāvena anattalakkhaṇaṃ kathitaṃ. Yasmā hetupaccayā viññāṇassa uppatti sati ca uppāde nirodhena bhavitabbaṃ, uppādavayavantatāya aniccaṃ viññāṇaṃ, yadi ca attā siyā paccayehi vinā sijjheyya, na ca tathāssa siddhi, tasmā ‘‘viññāṇaṃ anattā’’ti aniccatāya anattatā kathitā.
8. 《燃烧经》的注疏巴利
8. Ādittapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
235 235. 烦恼以一一细相显现,并成为其生起的条件,所以叫“随形好”,也就是手、脚等身体各部分,因此说“手美好”等等。“取相之执”,是指执取成为烦恼生起之相的方式。“合取”,是把各个部分合在一起后,以“这是女人”“这是男人”等想法整体地执取。“别取”,是分别地、无遗漏地执取。“如鳄鱼之取”,就是像鳄鱼吞食那样的执取。因此说“它把一切都取走”。至于对手、脚等,按各个部分区分后执取,则像红色布条一样,类似水蛭吸血般地执取。“乃至在一次速行心中也可得”,这是针对随眼门而生起的意门速行心路来说的。巴利
235. Kilesānaṃ anu anu byañjanato paribyattiyā uppattipaccayabhāvato anubyañjanaṃ, hatthapādādiavayavāti āha – ‘‘hatthā sobhanā’’tiādi. Nimittaggāhoti kilesuppattiyā nimittabhūto gāho. Saṃsandetvā gahaṇanti avayave samodhānetvā ‘‘itthipuriso’’tiādinā ekajjhaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Vibhattigahaṇanti vibhāgena anavasesaggahaṇaṃ. Kumbhīlasadisoti kumbhīlagāhasadiso. Tenāha – ‘‘sabbameva gaṇhātī’’ti hatthapādādīsu taṃ taṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ vibhajitvā gahaṇaṃ rattapāsadiso jalūkagāhasadiso. Ekajavanavārepi labbhantīti idaṃ cakkhudvārānusārena uppannamanodvārikajavanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
被相的味道所束缚,意思是:被对上述那种相产生的贪味执取所束缚、所系绑。唯由有分,意思就是只由根本有分心。显示烦恼的可怕,意思是:像这样,当烦恼生起时,如果死亡心被不善心隔断,那就必定会投生到地狱或畜生道中去;这是在显示烦恼应当令人恐惧。说了“或者从时间方面这样说”之后,为了阐明这个意思,又说“在眼门中”等等。染污的心,是指由贪欲而变成染污的心。以瞋恨心怎么能领受所缘的味道呢?应当知道,忧受的生起本身就是它在领受所缘的味道。这个时间,指的是死亡的时候。巴利
Nimittassādena ganthitanti yathāvutte nimitte assādagāhena ganthitaṃ sambaddhaṃ. Bhavaṅgenevāti mūlabhavaṅgeneva. Kilesabhayaṃ dassentoti tathā kilesuppattiyā sati akusalacittena antaritaṃ ce maraṇacittaṃ bhaveyya, ekantato niraye vā tiracchānayoniyā vā uppatti siyāti kilesānaṃ bhāyitabbaṃ dassento. ‘‘Samayavasena vā evaṃ vutta’’nti vatvā tamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘cakkhudvārasmiñhī’’tiādimāha. Rattacittaṃ vāti rāgavasena rattacittaṃ vā. Duṭṭhacittena kathaṃ ārammaṇarasānubhavananti? Domanassavedanuppatti eva tassa ārammaṇarasānubhavanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Imassa samayassāti maraṇasamayassa.
两鼻孔中间那块骨刺,用剃刀刀刃一样的作用把它切断。持杖住者,就是持长杖而住的人。躺卧入睡,这句话是为了遮止半睡半醒的惛沉睡眠。因为在那种半睡状态下,邪寻思之箭偶尔会有可乘之机;而躺下进入深度睡眠的时候,根本不会有这种机会。寻,指的就是邪寻思。巴利
Ubhinnaṃ nāsacchiddānaṃ majjhe ṭhita-aṭṭhitudanaṃ saha khuraṭṭhena chindanaṃ. Daṇḍakavāsīti dīghadaṇḍakā mahāvāsi. Nipajjitvā niddokkamananti iminā pacalāyikaniddaṃ paṭikkhipati. Tattha hi kadāci antarā micchāvitakkānaṃ sallakānaṃ avasaro siyā, nattheva nipajjitvā mahāniddaṃ okkantakāle. Vitakkānanti micchāvitakkānaṃ.
第9至10篇:第一手足譬喻经等的注释巴利
9-10. Paṭhamahatthapādopamasuttādivaṇṇanā
236-237 第九经里说到“被了知”的时候,这是依照觉悟者的意乐而说的,所以接着解释说:“第十经里说到‘不存在’的时候”等等。其实这两部经的差别就只有这一点。巴利
236-237. Navamaṃ ‘‘paññāyatī’’ti vuccamāne bujjhanakānaṃ ajjhāsayavasena vuttanti āha – ‘‘dasame na hotīti vuccamāne’’tiādi. Ettakameva hi dvinnaṃ suttānaṃ visesoti.
19. 毒蛇品巴利
19. Āsīvisavaggo
《毒蛇譬喻经》的注释巴利
1. Āsīvisopamasuttavaṇṇanā
238 238. 当时那些围坐在世尊身边、随侍世尊的比丘当中,有些是独住的,有些是两人共住的,有些是三人共住的,有些是四人共住的,有些是五人共住的,他们住在各处森林静修处。因此说“独行者……乃至……五人行”。这是指他们意乐相同、行为和合一致。他们是精勤修习业处的人。正因如此,他们才在那里专心投入。这是以个人的意乐作为原因来说的。“作为缘”,是指成为依靠。从“诸比丘,譬如”开始,一直到“已渡脱、已到彼岸、站在陆地上的婆罗门”为止,这是论母的安立。对这些论母的详细展开。“将成为习气”,意思是将会带来习气。像“举起须弥山”等说法,是在显示这部开示不共于其他教法、极其难行。巴利
238. Ye bhikkhū tadā bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā nisinnā, tesu keci ekavihārino, keci attadutiyā, keci attatatiyā, keci attacatutthā, keci attapañcamā hutvā araññāyatanesu viharantīti vuttaṃ – ‘‘ekacārika…pe… pañcacārike’’ti. Samānajjhāsayatā sabhāgavuttino. Kammaṭṭhānānuyuñjanassa kārake. Tato eva tattha yuttapayutte. Puggalajjhāsayena kāraṇabhūtena. Paccayabhūtanti apassayabhūtaṃ. ‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave’’ti ārabhitvā yāva ‘‘tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇo’’ti ayaṃ mātikānikkhepo. Tesaṃ mātikāya vitthārabhājanaṃ. Vāsanā bhavissatīti vāsanāvahaṃ bhavissati. Sineruṃ ukkhipanto viyātiādi imissā desanāya anaññasādhāraṇatāya sudukkarabhāvadassanaṃ.
就像在床上的东西用“床”这个名称来称呼一样,在口中的毒就以“口”来指称。因为它能造成像干木一样的性质,所以叫做“木”;因此,毒在它口中,就是“木口”——也就是通过咬等方式使对方变得像干木一样的蛇。另一种解释是:因为它能导致像干木一样的性质,也就是像“木”那样的毒在它口中,所以叫“木口”。按照这个方法,其余名称的含义也应当这样理解。“这四种”,是指按毒的作用方式不同而分为四种。现在为了说明这些毒的作用差别,才说了“其中”等话。犹如被铁枪刺中:就像体内被铁枪刺进去一样。如同熟烂的菠萝蜜:就像过了时节、煮熟后腐坏的菠萝蜜果实。在滤器中:指染布工人用来过滤碱水或过滤酒的器具。彻底断裂,如同雷击之处。以大钳:指用大钳子夹断。巴利
Mañcaṭṭhesu mañcasamaññā viya mukhaṭṭhaṃ visaṃ ‘‘mukha’’nti adhippetaṃ. Sukkhakaṭṭhasadisabhāvāpādanato ‘‘kaṭṭha’’nti vuccatīti kaṭṭhaṃ mukhaṃ etassāti kaṭṭhamukho, daṃsanādinā kaṭṭhasadisabhāvakaro sappo. Atha vā kaṭṭhasadisabhāvāpādanato kaṭṭhaṃ visaṃ vā mukhe etassāti kaṭṭhamukho. Iminā nayena sesapadesupi attho veditabbo. Ime cattāroti ime visakiccabhedena cattāro. Idāni taṃ nesaṃ visakiccabhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ayasūlasamappitaṃ viyāti abbhantare ayasūlaṃ anuppavesitaṃ viya. Pakkapūtipanasaṃ viyāti paccitvā kālātikkame kuthitapanasaphalaṃ viya. Caṅgavāreti rajakānaṃ khāraparissāvane surāparissāvane vā. Anavasesaṃ chijjanena asanipātaṭṭhānaṃ viya. Mahānikhādanenāti mahantena nikhādanena.
“由毒力发作而变异”是指由毒力发作所产生的变异。“由风”是指接触那条蛇的身体后升起的风。至于鼻风,那根本就不用说了。“依人施设”是指依那十六条蛇的“来毒”等名称,各自又分为四种,所以成为六十四种。“来毒”是指毒来得快,迅速上身的毒。“猛毒”是指毒性猛烈、极难治疗的毒。这种毒就像冷水一样,特性是极难摆脱。因为水蛇确实有猛毒,所以说“如同水蛇等的毒”。“显现”是指通过疮、疱等方式显现出来。名叫“无垢蛇”的是大毒蛇。名叫“青蛇”的是树枝颜色、在树顶等处活动的蛇。“依此方法”,是按照前面所说,在木口蛇中,将咬毒等分为“来毒而非猛毒”等四种分类的方法。在木口蛇中,咬毒、触毒、风毒这三种,以及在腐口蛇等中,咬毒等四种四种应当知道。巴利
Visavegavikārenāti visavegagatena vikārena. Vātenāti tassa sappassa sarīraṃ phusitvā uggatavātena. Nāsavāte pana vattabbameva natthi. Puggalapaṇṇattivasenāti tesaṃyeva soḷasannaṃ sappānaṃ āgatavisotiādipuggalanāmassa vasena catusaṭṭhi honti paccekaṃ catubbidhabhāvato. Āgatavisoti āgacchaviso, sīghataraṃ abhiruhanavisoti attho. Ghoravisoti kakkhaḷaviso, duttikicchaviso. Ayaṃ sītaudakaṃ viya hoti gāḷhadubbinimmocayabhāvena. Udakasappo hi ghoraviso hoti yevāti vuttaṃ – ‘‘udakasappādīnaṃ visaṃ viyā’’ti. Paññāyatīti gaṇḍapiḷakādivasena paññāyati. Aneḷakasappo nāma mahāāsīviso. Nīlasappo nāma sākhavaṇṇo rukkhaggādīsu vicaraṇakasappo. Iminā upāyenāti yoyaṃ kaṭṭhamukhesu daṭṭhavisānaṃyeva ‘‘āgataviso no ghoraviso’’tiādinā catubbidhabhāvo vutto, iminā upāyena. Kaṭṭhamukhe daṭṭhavisādayoti kaṭṭhamukhesu daṭṭhaviso, phuṭṭhaviso, vātavibhoti tayo, pūtimukhādīsu ca daṭṭhavisādayo cattāro cattāro veditabbo.
每一位:这六十四种当中,每一种各别计算。四种:按卵生等分类方式分成四类。五十六:就是五十再加上六。已走过的道路:按照前面所说的数量,从后往前简略计算时,依次就只剩下四种。以种姓而言:就是按木口蛇等种类、出身来区分。巴利
Ekekanti catusaṭṭhiyo ekekaṃ. Catudhāti aṇḍajādivibhāgena catudhā vibhajitvā. Chapaṇṇāsānīti chapaṇṇāsādhikāni. Gatamaggassāti yathāvuttasaṅkhyāgatamaggassa paṭilomato saṃkhippamānā anukkamena cattārova honti. Kulavasenāti kaṭṭhamukhādijātivasena.
蛇的毒液仿佛被灌注、遍布全身而存留下来,这就叫它们的“触毒”,也叫“风毒”。“注入毒”等说法也是这样。这里“蛇”(āsīvisa)这个词的词义,要按照词源学的方式来理解。“已升起的威光”就是威光高昂猛烈,或者说它们因为自身剧烈的毒性而具有凶残的特性。“难摧伏的毒”就是用咒术和药剂都难以制伏的毒。在“四种蛇”这一句里,“iti”这个词表示“等等”的意思,因此它在这里统括了经文的剩余部分。巴利
Sakalakāye āsiñcitvā viya ṭhapitavisāti hi tesaṃ phuṭṭhavisatā, vātavisatā vuccati. Evanti ‘‘āsittavisā’’tiādinā. Etthāti āsīvisasadde vacanattho niruttinayena veditabbo. Uggatatejāti udaggatejā, attano visatejena nesaṃ kurūradabbatā vā. Dunnimmaddanavisāti mantāgadehi animmaddanīyavisā. Cattāro āsīvisāti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho. Tenettha avasesapāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
关于“毒蛇之类”:应当知道,这些毒蛇就是咬人带毒的那一类。说到“就在身体上”:因为那个男子对它们当中的任何一条都没做过什么不好的事,而且他的寿命还在,所以它们没有咬他,应当这样理解。他为了如实说明而提问。“难以照料”就是难以服侍、照顾。“安稳之道”就是达到安稳状态的方法。巴利
Āsīvisesūti ime āsīvisā daṭṭhavisā evāti veditabbā. Sarīraṭṭhakesuyevāti tena purisena tesaṃ kassaci aniṭṭhassa akatattā āyusesassa ca vijjamānattā naṃ na daṃsiṃsūti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pucchi yathābhūtaṃ pavedetukāmo. Durupaṭṭhāhāti durupaṭṭhānā. Sotthimaggoti sotthibhāvassa upāyo.
“内行者”是指潜行于内部、伪装成朋友、破坏信任的人。因此说他是“杀者”。现在为了说明派遣那些女人的理由,才说了“第一”等话。“犹如已到面前”,就是迎面而来。世间语言里确实也有类似的说法,比如“把某人安置在寂静处”。所以“已到面前”的意思是:他已经来到面前。那块弯曲的木板,铺在树下,是供来来往往的人坐下休息用的。巴利
Antaracaroti antaraṃ caro sukhasattu vissāsaghātī. Tenāha ‘‘vadhako’’ti. Idāni tāsaṃ pesane kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭhama’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Abhimukhagataṃ viya abhimukhagataṃ. Īdisīpi hi vacoyutti loke nirūpīyati santiyaṃ purisaṃ ṭhapetīti viya. Tasmā abhimukhagatanti abhimukhaṃ tena sampattanti attho. Vaṅkasaṇṭhānaṃ phalakaṃ rukkhamūle āgatāgatānaṃ nisīdanatthāya atthataṃ.
一个手持船桨的人用它把人渡过去,所以叫渡具。从这一岸渡到对岸的桥,叫彼岸桥。可供一个人或两个人走的木桥,叫木桥。适合徒步队伍行走的桥,叫徒步桥。能够通车、让车过去的桥,叫车桥。这位婆罗门并不是究竟意义上的婆罗门。不过,为了说明这个意思在某一方面也成立,才那样说,所以接着说道:“因为排除了这么多敌人。”开示,就是标举教示。令回转,就是收回来。确实没得到,就是确实不曾得到。巴利
Arittahattho puriso santāreti etāyāti santāraṇī. Orimatīrato uttaraṇāya setu uttarasetu. Ekena dvīhi vā gantabbo rukkhamayo setu rukkhasetu. Jaṅghasatthena gamanayoggo setu jaṅghasetu. Sakaṭena gantuṃ sakkuṇeyyo sakaṭasetu. Na kho esa brāhmaṇo paramatthato. Tadattho pana ekadesena sambhavatīti tathā vuttanti dassento ‘‘ettakānaṃ paccatthikānaṃ bāhitattā’’ti āha. Desananti uddesadesanaṃ. Vinivattentoti paṭisaṃharanto. Na laddho vatāsīti na laddho vata āsi.
业就像国王,因为它在众生中行使支配力。国王……乃至凡夫,因为流转之苦就是罪过。所谓“以智出离”,是指由于厌离四大、离欲、想要解脱而生起的智出离,是通过证得圣道而成就的智出离。如此,这里譬喻的对应就达到了圆满。巴利
Rājā viya kammaṃ sattesu issariyassa vattāpanato. Rājā…pe… puthujjano vaṭṭadukkhasaṅkhātāparādhatāya. Ñāṇapalāyanenāti mahābhūtehi nibbinditvā virajjitvā vimuccitukāmatāvasena uppannañāṇapalāyane maggādhigamasiddheneva ñāṇapalāyanena. Evañhettha upamāsaṃsandanaṃ matthakaṃ pāpitameva hoti.
“正如……”等语,是用来举例说明一部分教说的集合。前面所说的内容,用注释师的话来印证,比如“变得僵硬”等。其中,“以木口或”里的“或”字表示譬喻。就像被木口蛇咬了以后会变得僵硬,同样,由于地界的扰乱,那个身体就好比木口一样;如同进入木口之中而变得僵硬,这就是意思所在。或者,“或”字表示决定的意思,应当把它和“地界的扰乱”连起来理解。这里的意思是:即使是被木口蛇咬了的身体,也只是因为地界的扰乱才变得僵硬,所以与地界不相离的那个身体,任何时候都如同进入木口一般。或者,“或”字表示不确定的意思。这里的意思是:被木口蛇咬了的身体,靠咒药可能僵硬,也可能不僵硬;然而,由于地界的扰乱,没有咒药的话,那个身体就如同进入木口一样,必定僵硬。这里,“身”指平常的身体。“腐坏”指被煮烂。“炽热”指全身灼热,达到极度炎热。“切断”指完全断碎,变成粉末。当身体达到僵硬等状态时,那个人就如同处在木口蛇等的口中,这就是意思所在。巴利
Yatheva hītiādinā ekadesanāsamudāyassa nidassanaṃ āraddhaṃ. Yathāvuttavacanaṃ aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vacanena samattheti ‘‘patthaddho bhavatī’’tiādinā. Tattha kaṭṭhamukhena vāti vā-saddo upamattho. Yathā kaṭṭhamukhena sappena daṭṭho patthaddho hoti, evaṃ pathavīdhātuppakopena so kāyo kaṭṭhamukheva hoti, kaṭṭhamukhagato viya patthaddho hotīti attho. Atha vā vā-saddo avadhāraṇattho. So ‘‘pathavīdhātupakopena vā’’ti evaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbo. Ayañhettha attho – kaṭṭhamukhena daṭṭhopi kāyo pathavīdhātuppakopeneva patthaddho hoti, tasmā pathavīdhātuyā aviyutto so kāyo sabbadā kaṭṭhamukhagato viya hotīti. Vā-saddo vā aniyamattho. Tatrāyamattho – kaṭṭhamukhena daṭṭho kāyo patthaddho hoti vā, na vā mantāgadavasena. Pathavīdhātuppakopena pana mantāgadarahito so kāyo kaṭṭhamukhagato viya hoti ekantapatthaddhoti. Tattha kāyoti pakatikāyo. Pūtikoti kuthito. Santattoti sabbaso tatto mahādāhappatto. Sañchinnoti sabbaso chinno cuṇṇavicuṇṇabhūto. Yadā kāyo patthaddhādibhāvappatto hoti, tadā puriso kaṭṭhamukhādisappassa mukhe vattamāno viya hotīti attho.
从差别来说,是指木口等的差别,以及地界等的差别。从“执取无义”等来说,是为了让人们对无义等事能像在有心识的众生身上那样,在无心识的大种上也直接看到,从而生起厌离,所以才这样开示。其中,“从住处”是指从生起的处所。“这些”是指诸大种。“相似”是指住处相似,也就是因为蚁丘、洞穴、丛林、垃圾堆等住处的相似而相似。巴利
Visesatoti kaṭṭhamukhādivisesato ca pathavīādivisesato ca. Anatthaggahaṇatotiādi acetanesupi bhūtesu sacetanesu viya anatthādīnaṃ paccakkhatāya nibbedajananatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Tattha āsayatoti pavattiṭṭhānato. Etesanti mahābhūtānaṃ. Sadisatāti vammikāsayasusiragahanasaṅkāraṭṭhānāsayatāya ca sadisatā.
从各自特相的角度来说,就是依各自不同的特相。地界等的坚硬等性质,以及通过让具有这些性质的众生产生坚硬等而引生变异,应当知道这是与毒力变异的相似性。巴利
Paccattalakkhaṇavasenāti visuṃ visuṃ lakkhaṇavasena. Pathavīādīnaṃ kakkhaḷabhāvādi, taṃsamaṅgino puggalassa kakkhaḷabhāvāpādanādinā vikāruppādanato visavegavikārato sadisatā veditabbā.
“无益”是指灾祸。“病”是指麻风之类的疾病。“在有中喜乐生者”是指对种种存在状态中的出生怀有喜乐习性的人。因为在五蕴构成的存在中,对出生的喜乐,其实就是对大种的喜乐。巴利
Anatthāti byasanā. Byādhinti kuṭṭhādibyādhiṃ. Bhave jātābhinandinoti bhavesu jātiyā abhinandanasīlā. Pañcavokāre hi jātiyā abhinandanā nāma mahābhūtābhinandanā eva.
更难照料,就是更难回报。难以接近,就是难以靠近。他们没法上前说“我来侍奉”。我们完全知道这只是业的名称,实际上并没有什么能帮忙的人。有无边的过患和灾祸,是因为有无量的过患和灾祸作为起因。单侧,就是单一的苦。巴利
Durupaṭṭhānatarānīti duppaṭikāratarāni. Durāsadāti durupasaṅkamanā. ‘‘Upaṭṭhāmī’’ti upasaṅkamituṃ na sakkonti. Parijānāma kammanāmāni, upakārā nāma natthi. Anantadosūpaddavatoti aparimāṇadosūpaddavahetuto. Ekapakkhalanti ekadukkhaṃ.
色蕴坏灭的时候,是带着四个非色蕴一起坏灭的,因为非色蕴与它同时灭去。在五蕴有的情况下,非色蕴坏灭时,也带着依处色一起坏灭,因为非色蕴灭去后,色蕴无法单独存留。所谓“仅以这一点”,就是指仅仅生起贪欲而已。慧被称为有身中最首要的部分,因为它在善法中最殊胜;而当烦恼生起时,慧便不再生起,所以说“仅以这一点,慧之首就已落下”。当与之相应的业缘存在时,便导向各趣。“生之怖畏、老之怖畏、死之怖畏、贼之怖畏”等所说的二十五种大怖畏,以及“他们砍手”等所说的三十二种刑罚,由于因缘已经具足成立,这些也就都出现了。喜贪属于行蕴,因为喜贪被行蕴所摄,所以这样说。巴利
Rūpakkhandhobhijjamāno cattāro arūpakkhandhe gahetvāva bhijjati arūpakkhandhānaṃ ekanirodhattā. Vatthurūpampi gahetvāva bhijjanti pañcavokāre arūpakkhandhesu bhinnesu rūpakkhandhassa avaṭṭhānābhāvato. Ettāvatāti lobhuppādanamattena. Paññā nāma attabhāve uttamaṅgaṃ paññuttarattā kusaladhammānaṃ, sati ca kilesuppattiyaṃ paññāya anuppajjanato vuttaṃ – ‘‘ettāvatā paññāsīsaṃ patitaṃ nāma hotī’’ti. Yoniyo upaneti tadupagassa kammapaccayassa bhāve. ‘‘Jātibhayaṃ, jarābhayaṃ, maraṇabhayaṃ, corabhaya’’ntiādinā āgatāni pañcavīsati mahābhayāni, ‘‘hatthampi chindatī’’tiādinā āgatāni dvattiṃsa kammakāraṇāni āgatāneva honti kāraṇassa samavaṭṭhitattā. Nandīrāgo saṅkhārakkhandhoti saṅkhārakkhandhapariyāpannattā vuttaṃ.
这段在巴利原文里本来就已经出现了,就是“诸比丘,纵使从眼……”等这样的说法。“没有得到任何东西”:在那个空村的譬喻里,仅仅凭盗贼对被抓之人说“什么也没得到”这句话,就已经表明这个人失去了自己的皈依处,所以不再另外举出。比丘相当于那个人的位置,而盗贼则相当于外处。“执取”是指作出观禅的执取投入。因为这段开示是依内处而说的,所以才说“依所造色的业处”。巴利
Pāḷiyaṃyeva āgatā ‘‘cakkhuto cepi naṃ, bhikkhave’’tiādinā. Kiñci alabhitvāti tasmiṃ suññagāme corānaṃ gayhūpagassa alābhavacaneneva tassa purisassa attano paṭisaraṇassa alābho vutto eva hotīti na uddhaṭo, purisaṭṭhāniyo bhikkhu, corā pana bāhirāyatanaṭṭhāniyā. Abhinivisitvāti vipassanābhinivesaṃ katvā. Ajjhattikāyatanavasena desanāya āgatattā vuttaṃ ‘‘upādārūpakammaṭṭhānavasenā’’ti.
外处,就是外六处。五种事务,就是那时盗贼应当做的五种事。手中之财,就是自己所有的、应当用手拿取的贵重财物。他们用打落等方式来抓手。打击之处,就是被打的地方。依处者,他们说即正是在那一刹那。舍弃能带来安乐的善法,而具有带来痛苦的恶不善法,就像舍弃能带来安乐的财物而向外走出去一样;因为善法是安乐的所依,所以这样说。发生抓手等行为的时刻,是善德之身当时被放逸所损害的时分。遭受打击等行为的时刻,是从那以后善德之身被更严重损害的时分。遭受打击等后成为非沙门的时刻,是善德之身如同到达死亡一般的时分。其余的人应当以奴仆的受用方式来受用,因此以转变成别的状态、落入在家人身份作为譬喻来说。凡是说“当所缘在六门出现时”的,正是依于那个所缘,应当知道会有来世的苦蕴,这就是这里的连接方式。巴利
Bāhirānanti bāhirāyatanānaṃ. Pañca kiccānīti corehi tadā kātabbāni pañca kiccāni. Hatthasāranti attano santake hatthehi gahetabbasārabhaṇḍaṃ. Pātanādivasena hatthaparāmāsaṃ karonti. Pahāraṭhāneti pahaṭaṭṭhāne. Ṭhānaso tasmiṃ eva khaṇeti vadanti. Attano sukhāvahaṃ kusaladhammaṃ pahāya dukkhāvahena akusalena samaṅgitā sukhāvahaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ pahāya bahi nikkhamanaṃ viyāti vuttaṃ sukhanissayattā tassa. Hatthaparā…pe… āpajjanakālo guṇasarīrassa tadā pamādena bādhitattā. Pahāra…pe… kālo tato daḷhataraṃ guṇasarīrassa bādhitattā. Pahāraṃ…pe… assamaṇakālo guṇasarīrassa maraṇappattisadisattā. Avasesajanassa dāsaparibhogena paribhuñjitabbatā aññathattappattigihibhāvāpattiyā nidassanabhāvena vuttā. Yaṃ ‘‘chasu dvāresu ārammaṇe āpāthagate’’ti vuttaṃ, tameva ārammaṇaṃ nissāya samparāyiko dukkhakkhandho veditabboti yojanā.
“色等”是指色、声、香、味。 “它们”是指上面所说的大种和所造色。 “以轻快性等”是指以它们的轻快性等。 “难渡处”是指无法渡越的状态,也就是瀑流处。 “以所说的方法”是指依照“相应的受是受蕴”等所说的方法。 “以四界等”中的“等”字包含了取蕴等。 “为了显示心的作用”是为了显示心的策励。 就是已经说过的精进,即在圣道中被称为“正精进”的那个。 “善一夜者等”是指依照“今天应当做精勤”等所说的《善一夜者经》等。巴利
Rūpādīnīti rūpasaddagandharasāni. Tesanti yathāvuttabhūtupādārūpānaṃ. Lahutādivasenāti tesaṃ lahutādivasena. Duruttaraṇaṭṭhoti uttarituṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvo oghaṭṭho. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘sampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho’’tiādinā vuttanayena. Catumahābhūtādīhīti ādisaddena upādānakkhandhādīnaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Cittakiriyadassanatthanti cittapayogadassanatthaṃ. Vuttavāyāmamevāti ‘‘sammāvāyāmo’’ti yo ariyamagge vutto. Bhaddekarattādīnīti ‘‘ajjeva kiccaṃ ātappa’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 3.272, 275, 276) vuttāni bhaddekarattasuttādīni.
“跛脚者”是指像断了脚的人一样,失去了行走的能力。“系缚于心”是指在那个心上把作用紧紧绑住。心里这样决定:“这条圣道是我渡过瀑流的方法”,然后又在那个道上持续不断地运转、发起精进,这就是对心的系缚。巴利
Kuṇṭhapādoti chinnapādova hutvā gativikalo. Mānasaṃ bandhatīti tasmiṃ citte kiccaṃ nibandhati. ‘‘Ayaṃ ariyamaggo mayhaṃ oghuttaranupāyo’’ti tattha cittassa sanniṭṭhānaṃ puna tattha pavattanaṃ vīriyārambho cittabandhanaṃ.
对于名色,这些喜贪等以及渴爱、无明等,作为它的缘,属于法处的一部分。这里,除了圣道、涅槃和渴爱之外的法,也属于法处的一部分。所谓“以十六种行相”,就是以压迫等十六种行相。“依六万种行相”,则是依照《念处分别》中所说的方法,以六万种行相来观察。在开示结束时……他们安住于果。这里特别指出,那些“了悟广说者”是通过把握的方式证得殊胜的,因此被标示出来,因为他们当时是以领受法的身份坐在导师面前。至于“了悟略说者”和“需被引导者”证得殊胜的情况,在注疏中并不通用,所以这里没有采用。巴利
Tassa nāmarūpassa ime nandīrāgādayo taṇhāvijjādayoti katvā paccayo dhammāyatanekadeso. Ariyamagganibbānataṇhāvajjo idha dhammāyatanekadesoti ca. Soḷasahākārehīti pīḷanādīhi soḷasahi ākārehi. Satipaṭṭhānavibhaṅge āgatanayena saṭṭhinayasahassehi. Desanāpariyosāne…pe… patiṭṭhahiṃsūti vipañcitaññū evettha gahaṇavasena adhigatavisesā paricchinditā. Te hi tadā dhammapaṭiggāhakabhāvena satthu santike sannisinnā. Ugghaṭitaññūnaṃ pana neyyānañca visesādhigamo aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na ruḷhoti idha na gahitoti.
2. 车喻经的注释巴利
2. Rathopamasuttavaṇṇanā
239 对于善护根门、饮食知量、具念、正知而住的比丘,说到:烦恼相的苦不再有机会生起,如此便成就了多乐与多喜悦。如同与果混合一般,那便是根本,成了纯一味的因。「他的」指比丘的。「圆满」指无有缺失。「无余灭尽诸漏」即漏尽,是最高的道。「那行」指在缓慢、中等、迅速等不同方式中的行走。「为了守护」即为了防护烦恼贼。「为了控制速度」即为了控制以烦恼为因的根门躁动之速。「为了不随从」即为了停止随顺烦恼的散动。「为了寂止烦恼」即为了令烦恼层层向上寂灭、平息。巴利
239. Susaṃvutindriyassa bhojane mattaññuno satassa sampajānassa viharato kilesanimittaṃ dukkhaṃ anavasaranti sukhasomanassabahulatā vuttā. Yavati tena phalaṃ missitaṃ viya hotīti yoni, ekantikaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Assāti bhikkhuno. Paripuṇṇanti avikalaṃ. Anavasesaṃ āsave khepetīti āsavakkhayo, aggamaggo. Yaṃ yanti dandhaṃ majjhaṃ javoti javādīsu yaṃ yaṃ gamanaṃ. Rakkhaṇatthāyāti kilesacorehi rakkhaṇatthāya . Veganiggahaṇatthāyāti kilesahetukassa indriyavegassa niggaṇhanatthāya. Nibbisevanatthāyāti visevanassa vipphanditassa nirodhanāya. Kilesūpasamatthāyāti kilesānaṃ uparūpari samanatthāya vūpasamanatthāya.
所谓“沙门之乐”,就是止、观、道、果的快乐。即使是已被调伏的骏马,也可能因为御者的驱使而有些许违拗;为了说明并没有这种情况,才说“使之无违拗后放出”。“智行”是说无碍地运转,更何况因为修习诸根已经完成,调伏烦恼是靠着快乐而成就的。施主的意乐有殊胜和低劣之分,所施之法的分量也有少和多之别。巴利
Samaṇarati nāma samathavipassanāmaggaphalasukhāni. Dantānampi sindhavānaṃ sārathino payogena siyā kāci visevanamattāti tadabhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘nibbisevane katvā pesento’’ti vuttaṃ. Ñāṇaṃ gacchatīti asaṅgamanaṃ pavattati pageva indriyabhāvanāya katattā, kilesaniggahassa sukheneva siddhattā. Dāyakassa ajjhāsayo vaso uḷāro lāmako. Deyyadhammassa pamāṇaṃ vaso appakaṃ bahukañca.
所谓“大帐处”,就是指在铜殿正前方、大比丘僧团集会的时候,为了足够容纳他们而应当搭建大帐的地方。“取量器”就是分派食物时用来盛放的器皿。巴利
Mahāmaṇḍapaṭṭhānaṃ nāma lohapāsādassa purato eva mahābhikkhusaṅghassa sannipātakāle tesaṃ pahonakavasena mahāmaṇḍapassa kattabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Gahaṇamānanti parivisagahaṇabhājanaṃ.
平时就已熟练掌握做饭工作的侍者近事男,或者说,以软、中、硬三种方式,也就是以烧、煮、炸三种方式来做烹饪的。巴利
Pakatiyā bhattakārakicce adhigato upaṭṭhākupāsako. Mudusamakharasaññitehi, dahanapacanabhajjanasaññitehi vā tīhi pākehi.
把食物清理干净,意思是把它弄干净到适合国王享用的程度。他把食物扔在地上,心想:“还没布施给比丘们,就被我塞进嘴里了。”他用嘴接住,是为了表明这食物本身没有过失。为了让他知道适当的量,他擦拭了。当被问“你是从哪里来的”时,他陷入了放逸。“随分”是指剩下的那部分。“此有义”是指这样做有它的目的。“其余”是指在巴利原文中虽未出现,但对于食物也应当知道适量。巴利
Parisodhetvāti rañño anucchavikabhāvaṃ parisodhetvā. Bhūmiyaṃ chaḍḍesi ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ adatvā mayā mukhe pakkhitta’’nti. Mukhena gaṇhi tassa niddosabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ. Mattaṃ jānāpetuṃ pamajji. ‘‘Tvaṃ kuto āgato’’ti pucchane pamādaṃ āpajji. Anubhāgoti avasiṭṭhabhāgo. Idamatthiyanti idaṃ payojanaṃ. Itaranti pāḷiyaṃ anāgatampi āhāre pamāṇajānanaṃ.
“卧”就是躺卧;“受用欲乐者的卧”就是受用欲乐者的躺卧。所谓“以右胁而卧”其实并不存在,因为右手没法做该做的事。说“由于威光殊胜”,是为了表明这是无畏者狮子般的卧姿。所谓“把两只前脚放在一处,两只后脚放在一处”,这是为了显示两脚不散乱的状态。巴利
Sayanaṃ seyyā, kāmabhogīnaṃ seyyā kāmabhogiseyyā. Dakkhiṇapassena sayāno nāma natthi dakkhiṇahatthena kātabbakiccakaraṇato. Tejussadattāti idaṃ anutrāsasseva sīhassa sayananti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Dve purimapāde ekasmiṃ, pacchimapāde ekasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetvāti hi idaṃ pādānaṃ avikkhittabhāvakaraṇadassanaṃ.
“第四禅的卧姿”是指属于第四禅的果等至。因为如来大多数都是先进入果等至,然后才躺下休息。注释者说,这种卧姿是出第四禅之后,因为已经断尽烦恼而般涅槃才采用的。这里说的狮子卧,是指双足相叠、前后不相分离的卧姿。因此说“此即是……”等等。“如是”是指按照前面所说的“以右胁……”等方式来摆出卧姿。巴利
Catutthajjhānaseyyāti catutthajjhānikaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ vadati. Yebhuyyena hi tathāgatā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjitvāva sayanti. Sā ca nesaṃ catutthajjhānato vuṭṭhāya, kilesaparinibbānassa ca katattāti vadanti . Idha sīhaseyyā āgatā pādaṃ accādhāya pubbenāparaṃ ajahitasaṃlakkhaṇā seyyāti katvā. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādi. Evanti ‘‘dakkhiṇena passenā’’tiādinā vuttākārena seyyaṃ kappeti.
怎样才是入睡时保持具念和正知呢?这里的意思是:他是以有分心进入睡眠的。所谓“不弃舍”,应当理解为:由于他倾向于那一点,所以在那时并没有弃舍念与正知。同样地,在他们入睡、初睡、中睡、后睡等阶段,念与正知都没有丢失。因此说:“即使入睡,也具念、正知。”而“这……”这一句,是在说明前面“即使入睡,也具念、正知”所说的那种方式。“是智界吗?”——对此古代长老们并不认可;他们认为,即使在入睡时,也不可能有像清醒时那样运转的智的体性。其意思是:在有分心不间断地生起时,念与正知不可能存在。因为在前面那种说法里,那只是念与正知没有守护,并不是有分心没有守护。由根律仪、于食知量、警寤勤修这三项,以及回避相与细相等,这一切全都属于观的部分,这就是其意旨。巴利
Kathaṃniddāyanto sato sampajāno hoti? Bhavaṅgacittena hi niddūpagamananti adhippāyo. Appahānenāti tadadhimuttatāya tadappahānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā tesu niddokkamanassa ādipariyosānesu ajahitasatisampajaññaṃ hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘niddaṃ okkamantopi sato sampajāno hotī’’ti. Etaṃ panāti ‘‘niddaṃ okkamantopi sato sampajāno hotī’’ti vuttanayaṃ vadati. Ñāṇadhātukanti na rocayiṃsūti niddokkamanepi jāgaraṇe pavattañāṇasabhāvamevāti na rocayiṃsu porāṇā. Nirantaraṃ bhavaṅgacittesu vattamānesu satisampajaññāsambhavoti adhippāyo. Purimasmiñhi naye satisampajaññassa asaṃvaro, na bhavaṅgassa. Indriyasaṃvaro, bhojane mattaññutā, jāgariyānuyogoti imehi tivaṅgikā, nimittānubyañjanaparivajjanādi sabbaṃ vipassanāpakkhikamevāti adhippāyo.
“那些”指的是在观照那一刹那生起的根等诸法。这个开示应当详细解说到证得阿拉汉果为止。不过在巴利圣典中,则是以简略的方式说的:“而他的如理作意已经精勤于诸漏的灭尽。”巴利
Tānevāti vipassanākkhaṇe pavattāni indriyādīni. Yāva arahattā desanā vitthārato kathetabbā. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘yoni cassa āraddhā hoti āsavānaṃ khayāyā’’ti saṅkhepena kathitā.
3. 《龟譬喻经》的注释巴利
3. Kummopamasuttavaṇṇanā
240 240.「骨龟」是指背上骨头尖利的龟。「被绳所缚」是指忙碌。就像把东西放进匣子里一样,收进自己的壳中。「收集」是指正确地放置,只向内放置。「在所缘的壳中」是指在所缘的容器中。「收集者」是指仅从所见取相之后,把心的思虑就地正确地安放在那上面。因为他不让那思虑以所缘的方式活动起来。说到「五法」时,就是指「我会在适当的时候开示……」等(《无碍解道》362)所说的。巴利
240.Aṭṭhikummoti piṭṭhiyaṃ tikhiṇaṭṭhiko kummo. Tantibandhoti byāvaṭo. Samugge viya attano kapāle pakkhipitvā. Samodahanto sammā odahanto ajjhattameva dahanto. Ārammaṇakapāleti ārammaṇakaṭāhe. Samodahantoti diṭṭhamattasseva ca gahaṇato manovitakke tattheva sammadeva odahanto. Tañhi visayavasena pavattituṃ adento. Pañca dhammeti ‘‘kālena vakkhāmī’’tiādinā (pari. 362) vuccamāne.
第四篇《第一木堆譬喻经》的注疏巴利
4. Paṭhamadārukkhandhopamasuttavaṇṇanā
241 就像嬉戏一样到达大海。所谓“内枝”,是指恒河岸边向内侧低垂的树枝。所谓“湿润”,就是变得湿透。那树枝横倒下来,像木桥一样横在那里,因此成了大众的依靠;也正因为它非常巨大,才没有被恒河的水流冲走等等。巴利
241.Vilāsamāno viya sāgaraṃ patvā. Antosākhoti gaṅgāya tīrassa anto onatasākho. Temetīti tinto hoti. Tiriyaṃ patito daṇḍasetu viya ṭhitattā mahājanassa paccayo jāto, tathā mahantabhāvena gaṅgāsotaṃ otaraṇādi natthi.
这里说的“此人”,就是指前面刚提到的那个人。进入圣道,就是踏上四种圣道之路。用“心名为……”等想法思量之后,还是不放下在家生活的束缚——这是前后文的关联。对自己亲近的人,就是对自己身边亲近的人。营生,指为了活命而使用的田地、宅地等;由这些营生得来的收入。即使此人为了乞食而给予比丘们身体上的和合聚集。巴利
Ayaṃhīti anantaraṃ vuttapuggalo. Ariyamaggaṃ oruyhāti catubbidhaṃ ariyamaggavīthiṃ otaritvā. ‘‘Cittaṃ nāmeta’’ntiādinā cintetvā gihibandhanaṃ na vissajjetīti sambandho. Attano bhajamānaketi attano bhajante. Jīvikatthāya payujjitabbato payogo, khettavatthādi. Tato payogato uṭṭhitaṃ āyaṃ. Kiñcāpi bhikkhūnaṃ kāyasāmaggiṃ deti bhikkhatthāya.
破唇瓶,就是瓶口破损的瓶子。打破肩膀,就是在肩膀上。僧伽受用,就是前往僧伽所拥有的受用村落。就意义上如此说,是因为意义如此成立,所以他们这样说,就好像真的如此说一样。仅以粥,指喝了粥之后,由于那粥还没消化,又咽下另一碗粥——这是前后连接的关系。巴利
Muṇḍaghaṭanti bhinnoṭṭhaṃ ghaṭaṃ. Khandheti aṃse. Saṅghabhoganti saṅghasantakaṃ bhogagāmaṃ gantvā. Atthato evaṃ vadantīti tathā atthassa sambhavato evaṃ vadantā viya honti. Yāgumattake yāgunti yāguṃ pivitvā tāya aparipakkāya eva aññaṃ yāguṃ ajjhoharitvāti sambandho.
被烦恼染污:因为没有如理作意,心就完全跟着烦恼走。瞪眼:因为嗔怒而瞪大眼睛,瞪着眼到处走。他掉举,不得平静。巴利
Kilesānurañjitovāti yonisomanasikārassa abhāvena kilesānugatacitto eva. Akkhīni nīharitvāti kodhavasena akkhike karonto akkhīni nīharitvā vicarissati. Uddhato hoti avūpasanto.
“堕于见者”:就是教内的人这样不如理地冒出来,把教法歪曲成非法、非律来宣扬,就像阿利咤一样。因此说“他确实……”等等。在无色有中,色是存在的;否则,从那里死后投生的众生,色蕴又怎么能生起呢?在无想有中,心是存在的,这里也是同样的道理。出世间道具有多个心刹那,正如“若有人修习这四念处七年……”等经文所说。随眠与心不相应;否则,有罪与无罪的法就会同时生起。那些有情流转轮回;否则,业与果的关联就不成立了。这样宣说时,就是执取邪说而宣扬。巴利
Diṭṭhigatikoti sāsaniko evaṃ ayoniso ummujjitvā sāsanaṃ uddhammaṃ ubbinayaṃ katvā dīpento ariṭṭhasadiso. Tenāha ‘‘so hī’’tiādi. Arūpabhave rūpaṃ atthi, aññathā tato cutassa kuto rūpakkhandhassa sambhavo. Asaññībhave cittaṃ atthīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Bahucittakkhaṇiko lokuttaramaggo ‘‘yo ime cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāveyya sattavassānī’’tiādivacanato (dī. ni. 2.404; ma. ni. 1.137). Anusayo cittavippayutto, aññathā sāvajjānavajjadhammānaṃ ekajjhaṃ uppatti siyā. Te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṃsaranti, aññathā kammaphalānaṃ sambandho na siyāti. Iti vadanto evaṃ micchāvādaṃ paggayha vadanto.
就像一棵未被水浸透的树……而难以听闻正法的人,也未被信仰的滋润所浸透。所谓“已学律者”,是指已经修学律的人,就像说“已学明者”一样。“应将应施法分配给说法者”,意思是:应当把这应施之物,按照各位说法尊者各自相应的情况来分配——这是从转交的角度来说的。白天说法者即诵经者,在傍晚说法;而在初夜分说法的夜间说法者,就是诵经的人。巴利
Temanarukkho viya…pe… dullabhadhammassavano ca puggalo saddhāsinehena atemanato. Katavinayo sikkhitavinayo yathā ‘‘katavijjo’’ti. Dhammakathikānaṃvicārethāti idaṃ deyyadhammaṃ dhammakathikānaṃ ayyānaṃ tassa tassa yuttavasena vicārethāti niyyātanavasena vatvā. Divākathiko sarabhāṇako sāyanhe katheti, purimayāmaṃ kathento rattikathiko bhāṇakapuggalo.
像欢喜园一样令人愉悦。他的负重比丘,就是为他承担事务的比丘,比如亲教师等人。听了以亲切问候为先导的、坐在一起交谈的话。巴利
Nandanavanābhirāmeti nandanavanaṃ viya manorame. Assa bhārahārabhikkhūti assa kiccavāhakabhikkhū upajjhāyādayo. Sukhanisinnakathanti paṭisanthārakathāpubbakaṃ upanisinnakathaṃ sutvā.
仅仅以住立的形态、以住立的方式而住立,就是“未应用”的意思。心、业、根等也是仅仅以住立的形态而住立,这样搭配理解。由于柔和:因为心的柔软而有所顾念。巴利
Ṭhitasaṇṭhāneneva ṭhitākāreneva ṭhitaṃ, nappayuttanti attho. Cittakammamūlādīni ṭhitasaṇṭhāneneva ṭhitāti yojanā. Mudutāyāti muduhadayatāya sāpekkhatāya.
“行道”:指止观的实际修行。阐明、显示、公开之后。“彼处生”:指在那里生起的寿。这是针对田地说的。手持油罐、蜜罐、糖罐等的人。他们因为行为不端而离开。“充满”:下面以及各处的过去时表述,据说是因为出自古注才这样说的。巴利
Paṭipadanti samathavipassanāpaṭipattiṃ. Dīpetvā pakāsetvā pākaṭaṃ katvā. Tatruppādoti tatra uppajjanakaāyuppādo. Khettaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tela…pe… hatthāti telaghaṭa-madhughaṭaphāṇitaghaṭādihatthā. Apakkamiṃsu dubbicāritattā. Pūresīti heṭṭhā ca tattha tattha atītāni kālavacanāni porāṇaṭṭhakathāya āgatattā kira vuttāni.
接近与不接近等,是指对此岸和彼岸的接近与不接近,以及在中间沉没。为了通达,就是为了了知。此,是指前面所说的眼的自性。忧,是指以那微弱状态为缘的忧。即使正在生起时,也叫作接近,因为已经生起了那种相的杂染。三种相,即依有已还无、有始有终、暂时、破常等,对三种相的随观来说的。巴利
Upagamanānupagamanādīni orimassa pārimassa ca upagamanānupagamanāni ceva majjhe saṃsīdanāni ca. Paṭivijjhitunti jānituṃ. Etanti yathāvuttaṃ cakkhusabhāvaṃ. Domanassanti tasseva mandabhāvapaccayaṃ domanassaṃ. Āpajjantopi upagacchati nāma tannimittasaṃkilesassa uppāditattā. Tiṇṇaṃ lakkhaṇānanti hutvā abhāvato ādiantavantato tāvakālikato niccapaṭikkhepatotiādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ lakkhaṇānaṃ sallakkhaṇavasena.
“左”是指错误。“右”是指正确。正如因为每个众生自身属于内在,所以把内处说成此岸;同样,因为它们属于外在,所以把外处说成彼岸。由于喜贪是在恶趣中间流转的原因,所以被称为“中间沉没”。巴利
Vāmatoti micchā. Dakkhiṇatoti sammā. Yathā tassa tassa sattassa orabhāvattā ajjhattikāni āyatanāni orimaṃ tīraṃ katvā vuttāni, evaṃ nesaṃ parabhāvattā bāhirāni āyatanāni pārimaṃ vuttāni. Apāyamajjhe saṃsaraṇahetutāya nandīrāgova ‘‘majjhe saṃsādo’’ti vutto.
“高”是指通过“我更优胜”等想法而陷入自我抬高。对于自我赞叹,应当理解为:借着粪扫衣者的身份而燃烧自己,这是一种伪装。所说的“这难道是石头?是树桩吗?”是指像一段可被执取的树干一样。巴利
Unnatoti ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā unnatiṃ upagato. Attukkaṃsane paṃsukūlikabhāvena attānaṃ dahanato aññākāratāgahetabbo. Pāsāṇo nu kho esa khāṇukoti gahetabbadārukkhandhasadiso vutto.
变成粉末碎屑,是因为漩涡的力量太强了。所谓在四种恶趣中,是说落入五欲漩涡的人,即使在人间,也会因功德之身被破坏而长久地变成粉末碎屑;正是因为他如此遭受了,才会投生到那样的恶趣里。巴利
Cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃhoti āvaṭṭavegassa balavabhāvato. Catūsu apāyesūti pañcakāmaguṇāvaṭṭe patitapuggalo manussalokepi guṇasarīrabhedanena dīgharattaṃ cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ āpajjatiyeva, tassa tathā āpannattā. Evañhi so apāyesu tādisesu jāyati.
戒本身并没有所谓的“恶”,所以这里的“du-”这个音节表示“没有”的意思,因此说“无戒者”。就像“恶事容易用恶来做成”等句子中那样,“恶”这个词是低劣的同义词,所以说“低劣法”。“不清净”是指身、语、意都不清净。“由疑惧”是指因自己的怀疑,或者想起他人的行为举止而产生疑虑。因此说“所以他……”等。“他进入那些业”是指他进入造作那些业的人中间。“功德腐败故”是指本来被当作功德的戒法等,达到了被染污的状态。“生于垃圾者”是指内在已经滋生了垃圾的人,或者他本身就是垃圾。巴利
Sīlassa duṭṭhaṃ nāma natthi, tasmā abhāvattho idha du-saddoti āha ‘‘nissīlo’’ti. ‘‘Pāpaṃ pāpena sukara’’ntiādīsu (udā. 48) viya pāpa-saddo nihīnapariyāyoti āha ‘‘lāmakadhammo’’ti. Na sucīti kāyavācācittehi na suci. Saṅkāya vāti attano vā saṅkāya paresaṃ samācārakiriyaṃ sarati āsaṅkati. Tenāha ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādi. Tāni kammāni pavisatīti tāni kammāni karontānaṃ antare pavisati. Guṇānaṃ pūtibhāvenāti guṇabhāvena gahitānaṃ sīladhammānaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhabhāvappattiyā. Kacavarajātoti abbhantaraṃ sañjātakacavaro, kacavarabhūto vā.
无债而出家,意思就是只有没有债务的人才能出家。由于已经说明了接近或不接近彼岸等情形,所以这里其实已经讲到了轮回与解脱。巴利
Aṇaṇā pabbajjāti aṇaṇasseva pabbajjā. Orimatīrādīnaṃ upagamanānupagamanādīnaṃ jotitattā vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ.
第二 树干譬喻经注释巴利
5. Dutiyadārukkhandhopamasuttavaṇṇanā
242 242. 凡是能通过出罪、通过发露而处理的罪,从覆藏的那一刻起,就因为会成为障碍而被称为“杂染”。但一旦发露出来,它就处于无犯的状态,所以被称为“非杂染”。因此说:“发露之后,他就轻松了。”这种杂染,或者因为覆藏,或者因为粗重性,而成为杂染。巴利
242. Yā āpatti vuṭṭhānagāminī desanāgāminī, taṃ paṭicchāditakālato paṭṭhāya saṃkiliṭṭhā nāma antarāyikabhāvato. Āvīkatā pana anāpattiṭṭhāne tiṭṭhatīti asaṃkiliṭṭhā nāma. Tenāha – ‘‘āvīkatā hissa phāsu hotī’’ti. Evarūpaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhanti paṭicchāditatāya vā duṭṭhullabhāvena vā saṃkiliṭṭhaṃ.
第6经 漏泄教说经的注释巴利
6. Avassutapariyāyasuttavaṇṇanā
243 集会堂就是召集大家来集会的堂舍。因此说“在出发的时候等”,其中的“等”字应当知道包含了吉祥大会等。“Santharanti”是休息的意思,也就是消除疲劳。“Sahā”是指因为集会而聚在一处。应当知道,“santhāgāra”这个词,是在“saha atthānusāsanaṃ agāraṃ”(共同进行义利教诫的堂舍)这个含义上,把ttha音变成ntha音而说的;首先,在那里为了商议而聚在一起讨论,这个行为就是“santharanti”。巴利
243.Santhāgāranti saññāpanāgāraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uyyogakālādīsū’’tiādi. Ādi-saddena maṅgalamahādīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Santharantīti vissamanti , parissamaṃ vinodentīti attho. Sahāti sannipātavasena ekajjhaṃ. Saha atthānusāsanaṃ agāranti tasmiṃ atthe ttha-kārassa ntha-kāraṃ katvā ‘‘santhāgāra’’nti vuccatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ, paṭhamaṃ tattha sammantanavasena santharanti vicārentīti attho.
三藏佛语本身自然就会到来,所以以佛语的到来为引子,也就等于说了圣果法的到来。在整夜三更中安住于那里的人,会有果等至的受用。而在那个比丘僧团里,具善法者和善凡夫们都在努力修观,因此圣道法也一定会在那里到来。巴利
Tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ āgatameva bhavissatīti buddhavacanassa āgamanasīsena ariyaphaladhammānampi āgamanaṃ vuttameva. Tiyāmarattiṃ tattha vasantānaṃ phalasamāpattivaḷañjanaṃ hotīti. Tasmiñca bhikkhusaṅghe kalyāṇadhammā kalyāṇaputhujjanā vipassanaṃ ussukkāpentā hontīti ariyamaggadhammānampi tattha āgamanaṃ hotiyeva.
用清澈的湿牛粪水,就是纯净的湿牛粪汁。涂抹,就是涂布。四种香,就是郁金、沉香、大麦花、多揭罗叶这些香料。种种颜色,就是青等种种颜色,又因墙壁不同而有种种形状的图案。有人说,所谓大座毡毯,是指铺在象背等处、因此被称为大座垫的毡毯。不过这话是针对精致织品说的,也有人说是四指以上的花纹大座毡毯。象铺和马铺,是铺在象背、马背上,绣有象马图案的铺具。狮子铺等,则是绣有狮子等图案的铺具。彩绘铺具,是用种种图形和种种花环装饰等做成花纹的铺具。巴利
Allagomayenāti acchena allagomayarasena. Opuñjāpetvāti vilimpetvā. Catujjātiyagandhehīti kuṅkumaturukkhayavanapupphatamālapattagandhehi. Nānāvaṇṇeti nīlādivasena nānāvaṇṇe, bhittivisesavasena nānāsaṇṭhānarūpe. ‘‘Mahāpiṭṭhikakojaveti hatthipiṭṭhiādīsu attharitabbatāya ‘mahāpiṭṭhikā’ti laddhasamaññe kojave’’ti vadanti. Kuttake pana sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘caturaṅgulādhikapupphā mahāpiṭṭhikakojavā’’tipi vadanti. Hatthattharaassattharā hatthiassapiṭṭhīsu attharitabbā hatthiassarūpavicittā ca attharakā. Sīhattharakādayo pana sīharūpādivicittā eva attharakā. Cittattharakaṃ nānāvidharūpehi ceva nānāvidhamālākammādīhi ca vicittaṃ attharakaṃ.
Upadhāna 就是靠垫。Upadahitvā 是把它放好,当作可以倚靠的东西。用香做成的花环叫香鬘;用多揭罗叶等做成的花环叫叶鬘。由“等”这个字,还包括用朱砂、笃耨香、闍提果、闍提花等做成的花环。做成结跏趺坐形状的坐具,叫结跏趺座椅。三面有靠背,或者只有一面有靠背的,是有靠椅;没有靠背的,是无靠椅。Yojanāvaṭṭeti 是指方圆一由旬的地方。巴利
Upadhānanti apassayanaṃ. Upadahitvāti apassayayoggabhāvena ṭhapetvā. Gandhehi katamālā gandhadāmaṃ. Tamālapattādīhi katamālā pattadāmaṃ. Ādi-saddena hiṅgulatakkolajātiphalajātipupphādīhi katadāmaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Pallaṅkākārena katapīṭhaṃ pallaṅkapīṭhaṃ. Tīsu passesu ekapasse eva vā saupassayaṃ apassayapīṭhaṃ. Anapassayaṃ muṇḍapīṭhaṃ. Yojanāvaṭṭeti yojanaparikkhepokāse.
“整理好”是指把安陀会的边角和另一边的角对齐弄平整后再穿好。因此说“像用剪刀裁莲花一样”,以及“遮住三轮”。因为诸佛的容貌圆满和威仪圆满都达到了极致,所以为了说明世尊当时就是那样庄严,说了“以金腰带”等话。其中,通过“以无与伦比的佛衣”等话,说明当时世尊没有理由隐藏佛的威神力,为了激发聚集在那里的天、人、龙、夜叉、乾闼婆等的信心,就以自己本来的自然威仪进入了迦毗罗卫城。诸佛身体的光明,本性上能遍照八十肘的范围,所以说“遍照八十肘之处”。佛陀的六色光明,就是蓝、黄、红、白、绯、光辉。巴利
Saṃvidhāyāti antaravāsakassa koṇapadesaṃ itarapadesañca samaṃ katvā vidhāya. Tenāha – ‘‘kattariyā padumaṃ kantento viyā’’ti, ‘‘timaṇḍalaṃ paṭicchādento’’ti ca. Yasmā buddhānaṃ rūpasampadā viya ākappasampadāpi paramukkaṃsataṃ gatā, tasmā tadā bhagavā evaṃ sobheyyāti dassento ‘‘suvaṇṇapāmaṅgenā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘asamena buddhavesenā’’tiādinā tadā bhagavā buddhānubhāvassa niguhane kāraṇābhāvato tattha sannipatitadevamanussanāgayakkhagandhabbādīnaṃ pasādajananatthaṃ attano sabhāvapakatiyāva kapilavatthuṃ pāvisīti dasseti. Buddhānaṃ kāyapabhā nāma pakatiyā asītihatthamattapadesaṃ visaratīti āha ‘‘asītihatthaṭṭhānaṃ aggahesī’’ti. Nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassarānaṃ vasena chabbaṇṇā buddharasmiyo.
从根部一直到枝梢,四面八方都开满了花、绽放了。“次第安放”等语是假想式的譬喻,意思是:就像……被装饰得格外耀眼,世尊也这样光辉灿烂,因为他由三十种波罗蜜所成就,所以说他如此光彩照人。有人说“二十五条恒河”是指:那条在入海口分成百道水流的大恒河,以及那些极大极大的恒河,共二十五条。在《破除戏论注》(《中部注》2.22)中说“二十五条河流”,意思是恒河等直到月轮河的二十五条大河,这也只是一种假想之说。“Sambhijjāti”是指混合、会合;“mukhadvāreti”则是指在入海口汇入大海的地方。巴利
Sabbapāliphulloti mūlato paṭṭhāya yāva sākhaggā samantato phullo vikasito. Paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitānantiādi parikappūpamā, yathā taṃ…pe… alaṅkataṃ aññaṃ virocati, evaṃ virocittha, samatiṃsāya pāramitāhi abhisaṅkhatattā evaṃ virocitthāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Pañcavīsatiyā gaṅgānanti satamukhā hutvā samuddaṃ paviṭṭhāya mahāgaṅgāya mahantamahantānaṃ gaṅgānaṃ pañcavīsatī’’ti vadanti. Papañcasūdaniyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.22) ‘‘pañcavīsatiyā nadīna’’nti vuttaṃ, gaṅgādīnaṃ candabhāgāpariyosānānaṃ pañcavīsatiyā mahānadīnanti attho. Parikappavacanañhetaṃ. Sambhijjāti sambhedaṃ missībhāvaṃ patvā mukhadvāreti samuddaṃ paviṭṭhaṭṭhāne.
“龙、金翅鸟、乾闼婆、夜叉等”这些说法,是依照假想而说的。“Sahassena”是指一千句,也就是一个诵分那么长的篇幅,这就是它的意思。巴利
Nāgasupaṇṇagandhabbayakkhādīnantiādi parikappavasena vuttaṃ. Sahassenāti padasahassena, bhāṇavārappamāṇena ganthenāti attho.
震动着大地:这是说,他凭着自己殊胜的功德,让大地发出巨响;即使如此,也不伤害众生。因为诸佛一切行为都极为右顺,所以先抬右脚。由于脚善安立,所以能平稳触地。虽然平稳触地,但因为皮肤细滑,不会被尘土染污。低洼处隆起等等,是诸佛获得名为足善安立的大人相所感得的异熟果报。不远抬足:就是不会把脚抬得太远再放下。不极近落下:就是不会在太近的地方落足,而是这样行走。令包括天人在内的世间欢喜:就是让包括天神在内的世间众生心生喜悦。以四足行走:就是四足行走者的意思。巴利
Kampayanto vasundharanti attano guṇavisesehi pathavīkammaṃ unnādento, evaṃbhūtopi aheṭhayanto pāṇāni. Sabbapadakkhiṇattā buddhānaṃ dakkhiṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ uddharanto. Samaṃ samphusate bhūmiṃ suppatiṭṭhitapādatāya. Yadipi bhūmiṃ samaṃ phusati, rajasā nupalippati sukhumattā chaviyā. Ninnaṭṭhānaṃ unnamatītiādi buddhānaṃ suppatiṭṭhitapādatāsaṅkhātamahāpurisalakkhaṇapaṭilābhassa nissandaphalaṃ. Nātidūre uddharatīti atidūre ṭhapetuṃ na uddharati. Naccāsanne ca nikkhipanti accāsanne ca ṭhāne anikkhipanto niyyāti. Hāsayanto sadevake loke tosento. Catūhi pādehi caratīti catucārī.
这是为了显示佛陀的威神力,所以叫做称扬之时。在讲说佛陀的身相或功德时,不该说这是“说得不好”。为什么呢?因为诸佛世尊的功德无量,对于了解这一点的人来说,赞颂佛陀的功德,只会顺着已经开始的方式继续深入赞颂。“用细布卷”——指用细布打结后拿着的布。巴利
Buddhānubhāvassa pakāsanavasena gatattā vaṇṇakālo nāma esa. Sarīravaṇṇe vā guṇavaṇṇe vā kathiyamāne dukkathitanti na vattabbaṃ. Kasmā? Appamāṇavaṇṇā hi buddhā bhagavanto, buddhaguṇasaṃvaṇṇanā jānantassa yathāraddhasaṃvaṇṇanaṃyeva anupavisati. Dukūlacumbaṭakenāti ganthitvā gahitadukūlavatthena.
脚步像象王一样迈步,是指落脚的样子和象王一样。百福相,是指由成百上千种福业所造就的大人相。像摩尼宝珠放光一样,是指像被八万四千颗宝珠围绕、极其明亮闪耀的摩尼宝珠那样。有些人说,毗卢遮那是一种宝珠。大娑罗树,是指像巨大的娑罗树,或者像洁净挺立的拘毗陀罗树等大树。像红莲一样,是指像被称为红莲的大莲花,或者像盛开的莲花。巴利
Nāgavikkantacāraṇoti hatthināgasadisapadanikkhepo. Satapuññalakkhaṇoti anekasatapuññābhinibbattamahāpurisalakkhaṇo. Maṇiverocano yathāti caturāsītisahassamaṇiparivārito ativiya virocamāno vijjotamāno maṇi viya. ‘‘Verocano nāma eko maṇī’’ti keci. Mahāsālovāti mahanto sālarukkho viya, suddhaṭṭhito koviḷārādi mahārukkho viya vā. Padumo kokanado yathāti kokanadasaṅkhātaṃ mahāpadumaṃ viya, vikasamānapadumaṃ viya vā.
就像把天河引下来一样,这是为了在关于它的杂论中,既显示别人极难做到,也让听法的人看到它能带来究竟的安乐。就像把地髓抽出来一样,好比装上汲水器械,把大地底层凝乳状的地髓朝上抽引出来。一由旬量的,就是一由旬的长度。蜜瓶,就是蜜层。巴利
Ākāsagaṅgaṃ otārento viyātiādi tassā pakiṇṇakakathāya aññesaṃ sudukkarabhāvadassanañceva suṇantānaṃ accantasukhāvahabhāvadassanañca. Pathavojaṃ ākaḍḍhanto viyāti nāḷiyantaṃ yojetvā mahāpathaviyā heṭṭhimatale pappaṭakojaṃ uddhaṃ mukhaṃ katvā ākaḍḍhanto viya. Yojanikanti yojanapamāṇaṃ. Madhubhaṇḍanti madhupaṭalaṃ.
“大”是指广大而殊胜的福德。“一切布施都等于已经布施了”:意思是,只要施主布施了住所,就等于布施了一切资具。因为即使有人走了两三个村子去乞食,什么都没得到就回来了,只要他走进一座有树荫和水的园林,洗个澡,在住处躺一会儿,再起来坐下,身体就像被注入了力气一样。人在外面走动时,身体的光泽会被风吹日晒消耗掉;走进住处,关上门坐一会儿,那些不调顺的身心状态就会平息,调顺的状态就会稳定下来,身体的光泽就像被重新注入了一样。人在外面走动时,脚会被荆棘刺到,被树桩撞到,还会遇到爬虫之类的危险和盗贼的威胁;走进住处,关上门坐下,这些危险就都没有了。读诵经典的人会生起法喜之乐,修习业处的人会生起止息的安乐,因为没有了外在的散乱。人在外面走动时,身上会出汗,眼睛会跳动,进入坐卧处的那一刻,床、椅等都看不清;坐下片刻之后,眼根变得清明,就像被注入了光泽,门、窗、床、椅等都能看清了。而且,人们看到有人住在这个住所里,就会恭敬地用四种资具来供养。所以说:“布施了住所,就等于布施了一切布施。”至于“地居……中略……不能”这个义理,应当用大善见王的故事来说明。“母胎无碍”这个义理,应当以最后有者的大菩萨入胎的方式来阐明。巴利
Mahantanti vipulaṃ uḷārapuññaṃ. Sabbadānaṃ dinnameva hotīti sabbameva paccayajātaṃ āvāsadāyakena dinnameva hoti. Tathā hi dve tayo gāme piṇḍāya caritvā kiñci aladdhā āgatassapi chāyūdakasampannaṃ ārāmaṃ pavisitvā nhāyitvā paṭissaye muhuttaṃ nipajjitvā uṭṭhāya nisinnassa kāye balaṃ āharitvā pakkhittaṃ viya hoti. Bahi vicarantassa ca kāye vaṇṇadhātu vātātapehi kilamati, paṭissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya muhuttaṃ nisinnassa visabhāgasantati vūpasammati, sabhāgasantati patiṭṭhāti, vaṇṇadhātu āharitvā pakkhittā viya hoti, bahi vicarantassa ca pāde kaṇṭakā vijjhanti, khāṇu paharati, sarīsapādiparissayā ceva corabhayañca uppajjati, paṭissayaṃ pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nisinnassa pana sabbepete parissayā na honti. Sajjhāyantassa dhammapītisukhaṃ, kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasikarontassa upasamasukhaṃ uppajjati bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvato. Bahi vicarantassa ca kāye sedā muccanti, akkhīni phandanti, senāsanaṃ pavisanakkhaṇe mañcapīṭhādīni na paññāyanti, muhuttaṃ nisinnassa pana akkhipasādo āharitvā pakkhitto viya hoti, dvāravātapānamañcapīṭhādīni paññāyanti. Etasmiñca āvāse vasantaṃ disvā manussā catūhi paccayehi sakkaccaṃ upaṭṭhahanti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘āvāsadānasmiñhi dinne sabbadānaṃ dinnameva hotī’’ti. Bhūmaṭṭhaka…pe… nasakkāti ayamattho mahāsudassanavatthunā (dī. ni. 2.241 ādayo) dīpetabbo. Mātukucchi asambādhova hotīti ayamattho antimabhavikānaṃ mahābodhisattānaṃ paṭisandhivasena dīpetabbo.
所谓“冷”,是指内在四大扰动所产生的冷,或者外界气候变化所产生的冷。所谓“热”,是指火带来的灼热,应当知道它也会在森林大火等情况中产生。“能阻挡”,就是能挡住。它起到这样的作用:不让身心因为这两者而生病受苦。因为当身体受到寒冷或酷热的逼迫时,比丘心思散乱,无法如理精进。“恶兽”,指狮子、老虎等凶猛野兽。进入有守护的住所,关上门坐下,这些危险就不会有。“爬虫”,指任何蜿蜒爬行的长身蛇类等,以及其他如此类者。“蚊蚋”,这只是举例,应当知道以此也包括虻虫等。“寒季”,指由寒冷时节以及连降七日大雨等情况下生起的寒季感触。“降雨”,即无论何时生起的降雨,都能阻挡,这是连接之义。巴利
Sītanti ajjhattaṃ dhātukkhobhavasena vā bahiddhā utuvipariṇāmavasena vā uppajjanakasītaṃ. Uṇhanti aggisantāpaṃ, tassa ca davadāhādīsu sambhavo daṭṭhabbo. Paṭihantīti paṭihanati. Yathā tadubhayavasena kāyacittānaṃ ābādho na hanati, evaṃ karoti. Sītuṇhabbhāhate hi sarīre vikkhittacitto bhikkhu yoniso padahituṃ na sakkoti. Vāḷamigānīti sīhabyagghādivāḷamige. Guttasenāsanañhi pavisitvā dvāraṃ pidhāya nisinnassa te parissayā na honti. Sarīsapeti ye keci sarantā gacchante dīghajātike sappādike aññe ca tathārūpe. Makaseti nidassanamattametaṃ, ḍaṃsādīnaṃ eteneva saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Sisireti sītakālavasena sattāhavaddalikādivasena ca uppanne sisirasamphasse. Vuṭṭhiyoti yadā tadā uppannā vassavuṭṭhiyo paṭihanatīti yojanā.
狂风与酷热可怕:风之所以可怕,是因为它能拔起、摧折树木等,并且有带尘、不带尘等不同种类;而热,则是在夏季酷热难耐时出现的、可怕的烈日之热。被遮止:就是被挡住、被排除。为了庇护:就是让心从各种所缘中收回来,乐于安住在寂静之处。为了安乐:因为前面说的那些危险都不存在,所以能安住于轻松舒适。为了禅那:在三十八种所缘中,把心系在任何一种上,通过让心专注一境来修定。为了观:就是以无常等角度来观察诸行。巴利
Vātātapo ghoroti rukkhagacchādīnaṃ ubbahanabhañjanādivasena pavattiyā ghoro sarajaarajādibhedo vāto ceva gimhapariḷāhasamayesu uppattiyā ghoro sūriyātapo ca. Paṭihaññatīti paṭibāhīyati. Leṇatthanti nānārammaṇato cittaṃ nivattitvā paṭisallāṇārāmatthaṃ. Sukhatthanti vuttaparissayābhāvena phāsuvihāratthaṃ. Jhāyitunti aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu yattha katthaci cittaṃ upanibandhitvā samādahanavasena jhāyituṃ. Vipassitunti aniccādivasena saṅkhāre sammasituṃ.
“Vihāreti”是指让他们依住处而住。“Kārayeti kārāpeyya”是指让人建造、促成建造。“Rammeti manorame”是指使心喜悦、令心愉悦。“Vāsayettha bahussuteti”是说:建好住处之后,应让多闻、持戒、具善法的人住在这里。让他们住下时,不要因为这些多闻者所需的资具而使他们感到疲惫。应当以正直、具足信解、对业果和三宝功德有清净信心与欢喜的心,这样布施他。现在,为了说明在家众与出家众互相饶益,说“te tassā”这一偈颂。其中,“te”指多闻者。“tassā”指优婆塞。“Dhammaṃ desentīti”是指开示能根除一切轮回之苦、导向出离的法。“Yaṃ so dhammaṃ idhaññāyāti”是说:那个人以在此教法中正确修行而了知彼正法,并因证得最高道,成为无漏者而般涅槃。巴利
Vihāreti paṭissaye. Kārayeti kārāpeyya. Rammeti manorame. Vāsayettha bahussuteti kāretvā pana ettha vihāresu bahussute sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme nivāseyya. Te nivāsento pana tesaṃ bahussutānaṃ yathā paccayehi kilamatho na hoti. Evaṃ annañca pānañca vatthasenāsanāni ca dadeyya ujubhūtesu ajjhāsayasampannesu kammaphalānaṃ ratanattayaguṇānañca saddahanena vippasannena cetasā. Idāni gahaṭṭhapabbajitānaṃ aññamaññūpakārataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘te tassā’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha teti bahussutā. Tassāti upāsakassa. Dhammaṃ desentīti sakalavaṭṭadukkhapanūdanaṃ niyyānikaṃ dhammaṃ kathenti. Yaṃ so dhammaṃ idhaññāyāti so puggalo yaṃ saddhammaṃ imasmiṃ sāsane sammāpaṭipajjanena jānitvā aggamaggādhigamena anāsavo hutvā parinibbāyati.
令居住是指布施住所。利益是指果报。因为供养和恭敬,初夜就过去了;又因为世尊说法,中夜也几乎过完了,所以经文里说“一夜已过多时”,因此他说“超过一个半夜分”。没有收入结集,是因为内容太广博。对诸佛来说,就连饭后的随喜祝谢,只要稍微展开来说,也会变成长篇或中篇的篇幅。为什么呢?因为佛陀齿龈密合,舌头薄,有分心极为短暂,说法时没有急促,没有延展,没有散乱心,一切知智圆满现前,无碍解没有丝毫减损。巴利
Āvāseti āvāsadāne. Ānisaṃsoti udrayo. Pūjāsakkāravasena paṭhamayāmo khepito, satthu dhammadesanāya appāvaseso majjhimayāmo gatoti pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘bahudeva ratti’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘atirekataraṃ diyaḍḍhayāma’’nti. Saṅgahaṃ nārohati vipulavitthārabhāvato. Buddhānañhi bhattānumodanāpi thokaṃ vaḍḍhetvā vuccamānā dīghamajjhimapamāṇāpi hoti. Tathā hi suphusitaṃ dantāvaraṇaṃ, jivhā tanukā, bhavaṅgaparivāso paritto, natthi vegāyitaṃ, natthi vitthāyitaṃ, natthi abyāvaṭamano, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ samupabyūḷhaṃ, aparikkhayā paṭisambhidā.
“开示之后”等句中:先作了与布施住处相关的如法开示。之后,“大王,这是戒,这是定,这是慧”,把戒等功德正确地指示给他们,就像用手牵着一样,让他们亲眼看清。“劝令受持之后”:即“应当这样受持戒,安立在戒上之后,应当这样修习定和慧”,让他们按照那样正确地领受戒等功德。“激励之后”:使他们所受的戒变得非常清净,修习止观时也能被善加净化,一层比一层更殊胜,这样激励他们,通过审察使他们清净。“令欢喜之后”:依照教导安住在戒等功德上,以现在已获得的功德利益和将来会得到的殊胜果报,使他们的心欢喜,因获得安稳而好好地满足。这些词的含义应当这样理解。释迦族的王族们大多数在听世尊说法后,在教法中获得了法味和安稳的立足处。巴利
Sandassetvātiādīsu sandassetvā āvāsadānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ katvā. Tato paraṃ, mahārāja, itipi sīlaṃ, itipi samādhi, itipi paññāti sīlādiguṇe tesaṃ sammā dassetvā hatthena gahetvā viya paccakkhato pakāsetvā. Samādapetvāti evaṃ sīlaṃ samādātabbaṃ, sīle patiṭṭhitena evaṃ samādhipaññā bhāvetabbāti yathā te sīlādiguṇe sammā ādiyanti, tathā gaṇhāpetvā. Samuttejetvāti yathāsamādinnaṃ sīlaṃ suvisuddhaṃ hoti, samathavipassanā ca bhāviyamānā yathā suṭṭhu visodhitā uparūpari visesāvahā honti, evaṃ samuttejetvā nisāmanavasena vodāpetvā. Sampahaṃsetvāti yathānusiṭṭhaṃ ṭhitasīlādiguṇehi sampati paṭiladdhaguṇānisaṃsehi ceva upariladdhabbaphalavisesehi ca cittaṃ sampahaṃsetvā laddhassāsavasena suṭṭhu tosetvā. Evametesaṃ padānaṃ attho veditabbo. Sakyarājāno yebhuyyena bhagavato dhammadesanāya sāsane laddhassādā laddhappatiṭṭhā ca.
因为前缀词有多种含义,所以前缀 abhi- 有时也和 ati- 同义,因此说“abhikkantā”就是“atikkantā”(已超越、已过去)。巴利
Upasaggasaddānaṃ anekatthattā abhi-saddo ati-saddena samānatthopi hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘abhikkantāti atikkantā’’ti.
对此,“据说”等语句,有些论师说:即使被系缚,也不是没有。因此他说“这是没有根据的”等。“身轻快、心轻快等生起”,这是说明身心变异的原因的表述,因为当轻快等生起时,通过获得无上的听闻,便能证得应知的义味与法悦。正如所说:巴利
Tatra kirātiādi kecivādoti baddhopi na hoti. Tenāha ‘‘akāraṇameta’’ntiādi. Kāyacittalahutādayo uppajjantīti idaṃ kāyikacetasikaaññathābhāvassa kāraṇavacanaṃ, lahutādiuppanne savanānuttariyapaṭilābhena laddhabbadhammatthavedasamadhigamato. Vuttañhetaṃ –
贤友,当比丘的导师,或者某位值得尊敬的同梵行者为他宣说法时,他就能在那一法中获得了知义理的喜悦,获得了知法理的喜悦,获得了与法相应的欢悦。巴利
‘‘Yathā , yathāvuso, bhikkhuno satthā vā dhammaṃ deseti aññataro vā garuṭṭhāniko sabrahmacārī, tathā tathā so tasmiṃ dhamme labhati atthavedaṃ, labhati dhammavedaṃ, labhati dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ pāmojja’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 3.322, 355; a. ni. 5.26).
背部风生起,是因为所执受的身体具有那样的性质,也因为诸行无常、总是伴随着苦。或者说“这是没有原因的”——这是根据某种用意而说的,为了阐明那个用意,才说了“能够”等话。他能够单盘腿坐下,就像在竹林村时那样。“在这么有限的地方”,意思是“在这么有限的地方完成了立足处”。而那个“确实”,是指把出定之想安放在心中。当他听法谈时,是出于对法的恭敬。巴利
Piṭṭhivāto uppajji upādinnasarīrassa tathārūpattā saṅkhārānañca aniccatāya dukkhānubandhattā. Akāraṇaṃ vā etanti yenādhippāyena vuttaṃ, tameva adhippāyaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘pahotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekapallaṅkena nisīdituṃ pahoti yathā taṃ veluvagāmake. Ettake ṭhāneti ettake ṭhāne ṭhānaṃ nipphannanti yojanā. Tañca khoti vuṭṭhānasaññaṃ citte ṭhapanaṃ. Dhammakathaṃ suṇamāno dhammagāravena.
对于“未漏泄的”一词,是指以贪等烦恼而处于未漏泄状态。“未漏泄者的原因”,是指造成染污状态的原因。“以烦恼的胜解”,是指以烦恼之力、以躁动之力。“如同熄灭”,是指如同寂止下来。“无漏泄”,是指远离躁动的。巴利
Avassutassāti avassutabhāvassa rāgādivasena. Avassutassa kāraṇanti tintabhāvakāraṇaṃ. Kilesādhimuccanenāti kilesavasena paripphanditavasena. Nibbāpanaṃ viyāti vūpasamo viya. Nibbisevanānanti paripphandanarahitānaṃ.
第7篇 苦法经的注释巴利
7. Dukkhadhammasuttavaṇṇanā
244 244.“苦法”是指苦的原因。所以他说“具有生起苦之法”等等。在这里,为了说明“什么是苦?什么是苦法?”这两者,所以说了“在五种(蕴)中”。那些就是指五蕴。因为它们是苦生起的原因,所以说是“具有生起苦之法的”。那个“它的”(assa)就是指“由此”,这里是在表示原因的意义上用的属格。“于欲”:指所缘欲和烦恼欲。另外那个“它的”,同样是在所属的意义上用的属格。“行”:指心的游走。“住”:指依靠五门转起的游走和安住。也有人说是“同一住处”。正因为这样,才说“跟随而行”。“跟随而行”:指从心路过程生起开始,一直到第三速行刹那,不断地追随、跟随而行。说到“跃入等”,这里的“等”字也包括了通过耕作、放牛等方式寻求诸欲所带来的苦。巴利
244.Dukkhadhammānanti dukkhakāraṇānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘dukkhasambhavadhammāna’’ntiādi. Tattha kiṃ dukkhaṃ, kā dukkhadhammāti tadubhayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pañcasu hī’’ti vuttaṃ. Teti pañcakkhandhā. Dukkhasambhavadhammattāti dukkhuppattikāraṇattā. Assāti tena. Karaṇe hetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Kāmeti vatthukāme kilesakāme ca. Puna assāti sāmiatthe eva sāmivacanaṃ. Cāranti cittācāraṃ. Vihāranti pañcadvārappavatticāravihāraṃ. ‘‘Ekaṭṭhā’’ti ca vadanti. Teneva hi ‘‘anubandhitvā carantaṃ’’icceva vuttaṃ. Anubandhitvāti ca vīthicittappavattito paṭṭhāya yāva tatiyajavanavārā anu anu bandhitvā. Pakkhandanādīti ādi-saddena kasigorakkhādivasenapi kāmānaṃ pariyesanadukkhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“Dāyati”的意思是“给予”,所以“dāyo”就是森林。因此他说“aṭavi”(密林)。“Kaṇṭakagabbha”是指像内室一样的森林。所谓名词,就是期待与动词搭配的词,所以这里用“vijjhi”(他刺穿)这个省略了的动词来补足动词的含义。巴利
Dāyatīti dāyo, vanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aṭavi’’nti. Kaṇṭakagabbhanti ovarakasadisaṃ vanaṃ. Nāmapadaṃ nāma kiriyāpadāpekkhanti ‘‘vijjhī’’ti vacanasesena kiriyāpadaṃ gaṇhāti.
迟钝的状态,就是已生起的烦恼无法持续停留。因此说“刚刚生起的”等等。“依于那个”是指依于正念。所谓“某些烦恼”,是就十四种心作用中,只在速行作用时生起的心之烦恼而说的。它们被剥夺了继续运转的机会,因此就被压制住了,所以说“不能安住”。说“在眼门”,是因为经文中首先提到眼门,按这个方式,其余诸门也同样被包含在内了。当贪欲等烦恼生起时,是在第一个速行心。由于忘失正念,当能了知“烦恼已在我中生起”时,便通过如理作意的忆念而获得了对治,因此说“这并不稀奇”。“回转”是指不如理地回转。“在转向等中”是指就在那种不如理的转向等心生起时,由于获得了可意的所缘,因缘条件具足,烦恼便达到了适合运转的状态。“逆转”是指即使在第二个速行心,也逆转了烦恼的生起。然而,他怎么能做到这一点呢?他说“对于已经开始修观的人”等等。“依于修习与审察”是指瑜伽行者安立于修习与审察之中。这就是它的功德利益:那些即使因为获得外缘而得到了生起机会的烦恼,也由于先前所修习的观智的威力而被压制,就这样被一再压制而退去;而善法只要获得了机会,就会越来越增长。巴利
Dandhāyitattaṃ uppannakilesānaṃ avaṭṭhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uppannamattāyā’’tiādi. Tāyāti satiyā. Kāci kilesāti cuddasavidhe cittassa kicce javanakicce eva cittakilesānaṃ uppattiṃ katvā tathā vuttaṃ. Niggahitāva honti pavattituṃ appadānavasena. Tenāha ‘‘na saṇṭhātuṃ sakkontī’’ti. Cakkhudvārasminti pāḷiyaṃ tassa paṭhamaṃ gahitatāya vuttaṃ, tena nayena sesadvārānipi gahitāneva honti. Rāgādīsu uppannesu paṭhamajavanavāre. Satisammosena ‘‘kilesā me uppannā’’ti ñatvā tathā paccāmāsasatiyā labbhanato. Tenāha – ‘‘anacchariyaṃ ceta’’nti. Āvaṭṭetvāti ayoniso āvaṭṭetvā. Āvajjanādīsūti tato eva ayoniso āvajjanādīsu uppannesu iṭṭhārammaṇassa laddhattā paccayasiddhiyā sampattaṃ pavattanārahaṃ. Nivattetvāti dutiyajavanavārepi kilesuppattiṃ nivattetvā. Kathaṃ panassa evaṃ laddhuṃ sakkāti āha ‘‘āraddhavipassakānaṃ hī’’tiādi. Bhāvanāpaṭisaṅkhāneti bhāvanāyaṃ paṭisaṅkhāne ca yogino patiṭṭhitabhāvo. Tassa ayamānisaṃso – yaṃ paccayalābhena uppajjituṃ laddhokāsāpi kilesā pubbe pavattabhāvanānubhāvena vikkhambhitā tathā tathā niggahitā eva hutvā nivattanti, kusalā dhammāva laddhokāsā uparūpari vaḍḍhanti.
“带来”是指带来之后。“随燃烧”是指它们看起来像是随着在燃烧。“躺卧”在这里也是同样的解释方式。“不回转”的意思是以沙门共性而言不退转。因为这里没有说明道与果的证得,所以只阐明了观的力量。巴利
Abhihaṭṭhunti abhiharitvā. Anudahantīti anudahantā viya honti. Anusentīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Anāvaṭṭanteti anivattante sāmaññatoti adhippāyo. Vipassanābalameva dīpitaṃ maggaphalādhigamassa ajotitattā.
《紧叔迦树譬喻经》的注释巴利
8. Kiṃsukopamasuttavaṇṇanā
245 245. 对四圣谛,依遍知、通达等方式而有种种见,这是依作用而说为种种见,所以说“见是初道的同义词”。这个见,因为在后面的诸道中“修习”这一说法已经固定下来,而初道是首先见到涅槃。因此说“初道”等。有人不理解如上所说没有颠倒的含义,可能会以为“智见”是依作所缘而过度延伸,为了遮止这一点,所以说“种姓”等。这里不称为见,举“见国王”为例。其实四道都是见,依上面所说的含义;但“修习”这一说法,是因为上面三道以初道之方便而修习的方式转起。见清净在此处,即见清净的涅槃。有触处作为业处,名为触处业处者。此理亦应于其余诸处。巴利
245. Catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ pariññābhisamayādivasena vividhadassananti kiccavasena nānādassanaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ, ‘‘dassananti paṭhamamaggassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti . Tayidaṃ uparimaggesu bhāvanāpariyāyassa niruḷhattā paṭhamamaggassa paṭhamaṃ nibbānadassanato. Tenāha ‘‘paṭhamamaggo hī’’tiādi . Koci yathāvuttaṃ aviparītaṃ atthaṃ ajānanto ñāṇadassanaṃ nāma ārammaṇakaraṇassa vasena atippasaṅgaṃ āsaṅkeyyāti taṃ nivattetuṃ ‘‘gotrabhū panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na dassananti vuccatīti ettha rājadassanaṃ udāharanti. Cattāropi maggā dassanameva yathāvuttenatthena, bhāvanāpariyāyo pana upari tiṇṇaṃ maggānaṃ paṭhamamaggaupāyassa bhāvanākārena pavattanato. Dassanaṃ visuddhi etthāti dassanavisuddhikaṃ, nibbānaṃ. Phassāyatanaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ assa atthīti phassāyatanakammaṭṭhāniko. Esa nayo sesesupi padesu.
“部分诸行”就是指诸行中的一部分。他们说:从最低限度来看,当只见到地界等纯粹法时,色的执取就成立了;当只见到眼识等与它同生的纯粹法时,无色的执取就成立了。巴利
Padesasaṅkhāresūti saṅkhārekadesesu. Heṭṭhimaparicchedena pathaviādike dhammamatte diṭṭhe rūpapariggaho, cakkhuviññāṇādike taṃsahagatadhammamatte diṭṭhe arūpapariggaho ca sijjhatīti vadanti.
他只是在说已经证得的道本身。意思是:他通过哪个入口投入观修,就对他说那个入口。这里的“这个”,是指那位询问业处的比丘。“这些”,是指修习触处业处和五蕴业处的人所说的话。说了“彼此不一致”之后,就用“第一种”等说法把那个意思讲清楚。因为五蕴解脱的行不存在,所以说了“无余”。同样地:就像对修习触处业处的人那样询问,对修习五蕴业处的人也作了同样的询问。巴利
Adhigatamaggameva kathesīti yena mukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ akāsi, tamevassa mukhaṃ kathesi. Ayaṃ panāti kammaṭṭhānaṃ pucchanto bhikkhu. Imesanti phassāyatanakammaṭṭhānikapañcakkhandhakammaṭṭhānikānaṃ vacanaṃ. ‘‘Aññamaññaṃ na sametī’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti ‘‘paṭhamenā’’tiādinā. Pañcakkhandhavimuttassa saṅkhārassa abhāvā ‘‘nippadesesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathevāti yatheva phassāyatanakammaṭṭhānikaṃ, tatheva taṃ pañcakkhandhakammaṭṭhānikaṃ pucchitvā.
诸界平稳生起,意思是味等身体诸界平稳地生起,而不是处在不平衡的状态。因此说“身体健全,体力充足”。“过去的行”等,是就观照的投入方式而说的。遍察在任何时候都应当修习。“行境之地”指活动的领域。巴利
Samappavattā dhātuyoti rasādayo sarīradhātuyo samappavattā, na visamākārasaṇṭhitā ahesuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kallasarīraṃ balappatta’’nti. ‘‘Atītā saṅkhārā’’tiādi vipassanābhinivesavasena vuttaṃ. Sammasanaṃ sabbatthakameva icchitabbaṃ. Cāribhūminti gocaraṭṭhānaṃ.
“造作者的状态”就是指投入修行的状态。“黄疸病人”就是患黄疸病的人。“阿梨咤”是指药线。“制作了药”就是进行了药物的配制。“我将做”就是我将制作药物。“像烧过的柱子一样”就是像被烧过的柱子一样,因为它被碱液网缠绕着,又被嫩芽簇覆盖着。巴利
Kārakabhāvanti bhāvanānuyuñjanabhāvaṃ. Paṇḍurogapurisoti paṇḍurogī puriso. Ariṭṭhanti suttaṃ. Bhesajjaṃ katvāti bhesajjapayogaṃ katvā. Karissāmīti bhesajjaṃ karissāmi. Jhāmathuṇo viyāti daḍḍhathuṇo viya khārakajālanaddhattā taruṇamakulasantānasañchannattā.
在南门村,就是南门附近的村子。红色者,就是红色的。刚长出的垂布条,就像刚长出来垂挂着的布条。已取嫩芽,就是已经摘掉果实的嫩芽。浓荫,就是厚密的树荫。因为那棵树的枝条不稀疏,叶子浓密,互相交错而长在一起,所以它的树荫也是那样,因此说“浓荫,就是互相交错而形成的树荫”,意思是稠密的树荫。此处等句,是与譬喻的配合。巴利
Dakkhiṇadvāragāmeti dakkhiṇadvārasamīpe gāme. Lohitakoti lohitavaṇṇo. Ocirakajātoti jātaolambamānacirako viya. Ādinnasipāṭikoti gahitaphalapotako. Sandacchāyoti bahalacchāyo. Yasmā tassa rukkhassa sākhā aviraḷā ghanappattā aññamaññaṃ saṃsanditvā ṭhitā, tasmā chāyāpissa tādisīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sandacchāyo nāma saṃsanditvā ṭhitacchāyo’’ti, ghanacchāyoti attho. Tatthātiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ.
以各种方式倾向的人,是指通过六触处等门径,以各自观修的专注方式修观、并已倾向涅槃的人。由于遍知等成就,其观极为清净。以那种种方式,就是依自己所倾向的方式。现在,为了结合譬喻来显示那各种方式,便开始了“正如……”等开示。这些是很容易理解的。巴利
Yenayenākārena adhimuttānanti chaphassāyatanādimukhena yena yena vipassanābhinivesena vipassantānaṃ nibbānañca adhimuttānaṃ. Suṭṭhu visuddhaṃ pariññātisamayādisiddhiyā. Tena tenevākārenāti attanādhimuttākārena. Idāni taṃ taṃ ākāraṃ upamāya saddhiṃ yojetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Taṃ suviññeyyameva.
这说的是那个城市譬喻。如果由紧祝迦树譬喻所说明的义理已经善加把握,那就是“已善标列”。属于这位比丘。“为说法义”,是为了让按照所把握之义而获得殊胜的人进一步增长。“即彼义理”,是指那被称为见清净的义理。盗贼的疑惧不会产生,因为中部地区王国境内安宁澄净。“三男子身高量”,是指高度相当于三个男子,以种种墙壁装饰得色彩斑斓,柱子上方又有花鬘等各种工巧装饰,呈弓形,令人心悦。因此说“为了庄严城市”。由于是为了建立城门的坚固而设置,所以说“也有防贼之用”。“门柱结合处”,指门柱。“这些是常住的,这些是外来的,其中,通过这些人对城市和城主有意义,通过这些则可能产生无义”,具备这样了知的智慧,名为聪慧。具备能防范未知危害的机敏,名为巧善。“即所谓处生智”,是指在各种应办事务中,当下就能生起的辩才,即此所谓处生智。巴利
Idanti nagaropamaṃ. Taṃ sallakkhitanti kiṃsukopamadīpitaṃ atthajātaṃ sace sallakkhitaṃ. Assa bhikkhuno. Dhammadesanatthanti yathāsallakkhitassa atthassa vasena laddhavisesassa upabrūhanāya. Tassevatthassāti tassa dassanavisuddhisaṅkhātassa atthassa. Corāsaṅkā na honti majjhimadesarajjassa pasannabhāvato. Tipurisubbedhānīti ubbedhena tipurisappamāṇāni nānābhittivicittāni thambhānaṃ upari vividhamālākammādivicittadhanurākāralakkhitāni manoramāni. Tenāha ‘‘nagarassa alaṅkārattha’’nti. Nagaradvārassa thirabhāvāpādanavasena ṭhapetabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘coranivāraṇatthānipi hontiyevā’’ti. Piṭṭhasaṅghātassāti dvārabāhassa. ‘‘Ime āvāsikā, ime āgantukā, tatthāpi ca imehi nagarassa nagarasāmikassa ca attho. Imesaṃ vasena anattho siyā’’ti jānanañāṇasaṅkhātena paṇḍiccena samannāgato. Aññātanivāraṇe paṭubhāvasaṅkhātena veyyattiyena samannāgato. Ṭhānuppattikapaññāsaṅkhātāyāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthakicce taṅkhaṇuppajjanakapaṭibhānasaṅkhātāya.
国王所委派、任命的人,就是“王所委任者”,也就是被安插在各个地方、替国王办理该办事务的人。所谓“仅仅几天”,是说才过了几天,就因为他没有履行职责,他的职位便动摇了,因此说“把一切审判处所等职位都撤掉之后”。巴利
Raññā āyutto niyojito rājāyutto, tattha tattha rañño kātabbakicce ṭhapitapuriso. Katipāheyevāti katipayadivaseyeva akiccakaraṇena tassa ṭhānaṃ vibbhamo jātoti katvā vuttaṃ – ‘‘sabbāni vinicchayaṭṭhānādīni hāretvā’’ti.
“砍掉他的头”意思是:砍掉他在那里如同头颅、处于最高肢体位置的王家事务。换句话说,就是砍掉他在那里所承担的王家事务。如果按通常的字面意思来理解,那就成了下令杀生。因为转轮王不会下这样的命令,而且也会阻止别人这样做。或者,“砍掉”可以这样理解:你依我的命令,做出好像要砍他头的样子;这样一来,他因为该处教诫而成为受惩罚者,就会消沉下去;后面的修行方式也正是由此而来。“在那里”指的是在那座边境城市里。巴利
Sīsamassa chindāhīti sīsabhūtaṃ uttamaṅgaṭṭhāniyaṃ tattha tassa rājakiccaṃ chindāti attho. Aññathā tassa pākatike atthe gayhamāne pāṇātipāto āṇatto nāma siyā. Na hi cakkavattirājā tādisaṃ āṇāpeti, aññesampi tato nivārakattā. Atha vā chindāhīti mama āṇāya assa sīsaṃ chindanto viya attānaṃ dassehi, evaṃ so tatthovādapaṭikarattapatto odameyyāti, tathā ceva upari paṭipatti āgatā. Tatthāti etasmiṃ paccantimanagare.
由已生起的:即是在止的业处上生起的。巴利
Uppannenāti samathakammaṭṭhāne uppannena.
“即是那一个的”这句话,要连起来理解为:就是那被称为“门”的有身之城所说的那些门。“速疾的使者一双”所说的,也是照这样连接起来理解。因为心所依处色是以十字路口的方式被取在中间,所以经文说“作为心所依处所依的大种”。如果是这样,按理只应取所依处色本身,那为什么这里不取它,反而取大种呢?因此他说“因为所依处色的……”等等。“如同”是指:就正见等来说,如同前面已经讲过的观道那样。说了“这道也因为具备八支,所以也正是那样”之后,就把圣道称为“如所来之道”。“这是此时此处的”是指:在这部经中,为了解说教法而引来的上述譬喻,现在作这样的对应结合。巴利
Tassevāti sakkāyasaṅkhātassa nagarassa ‘‘dvārānī’’ti vuttānīti ānetvā sambandho. ‘‘Sīghaṃ dūtayuga’’nti vuttāti yojanā. Hadayavatthurūpassa majjhe siṅghāṭakabhāvena gahitattā ‘‘hadayavatthussa nissayabhūtānaṃ mahābhūtāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Yadi evaṃ vatthurūpameva gahetabbaṃ, tadevettha aggahetvā kasmā mahābhūtaggahaṇanti āha ‘‘vatthurūpassa hī’’tiādi. Yādisoti sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ vasena yādiso eva pubbe āgatavipassanāmaggo. ‘‘Ayampi aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatattā tādiso evā’’ti vatvā ariyamaggo ‘‘yathāgatamaggo’’ti vutto. Idaṃ tāvetthāti ettha etasmiṃ sutte dhammadesanatthaṃ ābhatāya yathāvuttaupamāya idaṃ saṃsandanaṃ.
这里所说的“对应”,是指接下来要讲的譬喻与法义的对应。城主这个譬喻,是为了显示以五蕴为观察对象而达到见清净的漏尽者。十字路口这个譬喻,是为了显示以四大为观察对象而达到见清净的漏尽者。这就是它们之间的关联。说了“只讲了四谛”之后,为了确定并显示这些谛,所以说了“即使用完整的……”等话。在这里,城市的各种设施代表六门等,因此用它们来比喻六触处等。而这些属于苦谛的范围,所以说“通过城市的设施,只讲了苦谛”。巴利
Idaṃ saṃsandananti idāni vakkhamānaṃ upamāya saṃsandanaṃ. Nagarasāmiupamā pañcakkhandhavasena dassanavisuddhipattaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dassetuṃ ābhatā. Siṅghāṭakūpamā catumahābhūtavasena dassanavisuddhipattaṃ khīṇāsavaṃ dassetuṃ ābhatāti yojanā. ‘‘Catusaccameva kathita’’nti vatvā tāni saccāni niddhāretvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sakalenapi hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idha nagarasambhāro chadvārādayo. Tena hi chaphassāyatanādayo upamitā. Te pana dukkhasaccapariyāpannāti vuttaṃ ‘‘nagarasambhārena dukkhasaccameva kathita’’nti.
《琴喻经》注释巴利
9. Vīṇopamasuttavaṇṇanā
246 比丘或比丘尼:经中确实只提到了这两类弟子,但对于其余各类弟子,以及其他的天、人等众生来说,这也是共通的法之摄受。为了用譬喻来显示这个道理,所以开始说“如同所谓的……”等。“施与者”:就是布施的人。“应得的”:就是可以获得、应当证得的意思。巴利
246.Bhikkhussa vā bhikkhuniyā vāti kāmaṃ pāḷiyaṃ parisādvayameva gahitaṃ, sesaparisānaṃ pana tadaññesampi devamanussānanti sabbasādhāraṇovāyaṃ dhammasaṅgahoti imamatthaṃ upamāpubbakaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Yajantoti dadanto. Vinditabboti laddhabbo, adhigantabboti attho.
所谓“欲”,就是渴爱之欲。因此说:“微弱的渴爱,无法让心染着。”先前生起的,是指对同一个所缘最初生起的那一个。它因为没有被反复修习,所以软弱无力。那个,就是欲。不能令心染着,是因为没有获得反复修习。嗔,则名为心的污染。那些,是指执杖等行为。以那些为根的,就是以贪为根的谄、诳、慢、过慢、恶见、散乱等;以嗔为根的忿、恨、覆、悭、嫉、固执、好争等;以痴为根的无惭、无愧、昏沉睡眠、疑、掉举、非理作意等——这些染污法,因为以那些为根,所以都被包含在内了。然而,一切染污法都归属于十二种不善心的生起,为了显示它们在这里也被包含,所以说“欲即贪等”。巴利
Chandoti taṇhāchando. Tenāha – ‘‘dubbalataṇhā so rañjetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti. Pubbuppattikā ekasmiṃ ārammaṇe paṭhamaṃ uppannā. Sā hi anāsevanattā mandā. Soti chando. Rañjetuṃ na sakkoti laddhāsevanattā. Doso nāma cittadūsanattā. Tānīti daṇḍādānādīni. Tammūlakāti lobhamūlakā tāva māyāsāṭheyyamānātimānadiṭṭhicāpalādayo, dosamūlakā upanāhamakkhapalāsaissāmacchariyathambhasārambhādayo, mohamūlakā ahirika-anottappa-thinamiddhavicikicchuddhacca-viparītamanasikārādayo, saṃkilesadhammā gahitāva honti taṃmūlakattā. Yasmā pana sabbepi saṃkilesadhammā dvādasākusalacittuppādapariyāpannā eva, tasmā tesampettha gahitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘chando rāgoti vā’’ti vuttaṃ.
因为应当被畏惧,所以叫“有怖畏”。因为是令人恐惧的,所以叫“有恐惧”。因为能镇伏善法一方,所以叫“有荆棘”。因为善法和无过失的法难以进入,所以叫“有稠林”。因为不给出有之成就和涅槃,所以叫“邪道”。因为是通往恶趣的道路,所以叫“恶道”。“运作”:指转动、行持。因为通往恶趣,烦恼本身就是“烦恼道”。既然连有之成就都无法到达,更何况前往涅槃——这就是其中的意趣。巴利
Bhāyitabbaṭṭhena sabhayo. Bheravaṭṭhena sappaṭibhayo. Kusalapakkhassa vikkhambhanaṭṭhena sakaṇṭako. Kusalaanavajjadhammehi duravagāhaṭṭhena sagahano. Bhavasampattibhavanibbānānaṃ appadānabhāvato ummaggo. Duggatigāmimaggattā kummaggo. Iriyanāti vattanā paṭipajjanā. Duggatigāmitāya kileso eva kilesamaggo. Na sakkā sampattibhavaṃ gantuṃ kuto nibbānagamananti adhippāyo.
“以不净作意等”这里,“等”这个字要理解为也把无常作意等包括进去了。心就退回来了,有贪的心不再生起,因为它已经被对治的作意清除掉了。“以中舍为所缘”:是指以无智中舍为所依的所缘。“总说……遍问……亲近师长而作意”:以让人开示的方式叫“总说”,以让人反复询问的方式叫“遍问”,以住在师长身边的方式叫“亲近师长”,指的是转向这些的人。心:通过甚深智行、观察、亲近有智慧的人,以对那(无智中舍)的胜解之成就,无智的心就退回来了。巴利
Asubhāvajjanādīhīti ādi-saddena aniccamanasikārādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Cittaṃ nivattati sarāgacittaṃ na uppajjati paṭipakkhamanasikārena vinoditattā. Majjhattārammaṇeti aññāṇupekkhaṭṭhāniye ārammaṇe. Uddesa…pe… āvajjantassāti uddisāpanavasena uddesaṃ, paripucchāpanavasena paripucchaṃ, garūnaṃ santike vasanavasena garuvāsaṃ āvajjantassa. Cittanti gambhīrañāṇacariya-paccavekkhaṇa-paññavanta-puggalasevanavasena tadadhimuttisiddhiyā aññāṇacittaṃ nivattati.
就像说“福德是应受供养、能带来果报的”,又说“这样福德就增长”(《长部》3.80),同样,因为是从谷物生起的,所以称为“谷物”。因此说:“‘谷物’是指在谷物生长之处生起的农作物。”巴利
Yathā ‘‘pujjabhavaphalaṃ puñña’’nti vuttaṃ ‘‘evamidaṃ puññaṃ pavaḍḍhatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.80), evaṃ kiṭṭhasambhavattā ‘‘kiṭṭha’’nti vuttanti āha ‘‘kiṭṭhanti kiṭṭhaṭṭhāne uppannasassa’’nti.
“Ghaṭā”在这里指的是一对角,所以说“在两角之间”。他们说,“Ghaṭā”是牛等动物两角之间那个位置的叫法。“于鼻绳处”,指鼻绳穿过的位置。巴利
Ghaṭāti siṅgayugaṃ idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘dvinnaṃ siṅgānaṃ antare’’ti. Ghaṭāti goṇādīnaṃ siṅgantaraṭṭhassa samaññāti vadanti. Nāsārajjuketi nāsārajjupātaṭṭhāne.
调伏:从种种所缘中退离,即调伏。它:指心。那经是我善说的:那时,指那时那位比丘的。于所缘:指在业处所缘上。巴利
Dameti puthuttārammaṇato nivāreti. Nanti cittaṃ. Yaṃ suttaṃ subhāsitaṃ mayā. Tadassāti tadā assa bhikkhuno. Ārammaṇeti kammaṭṭhānārammaṇe.
“善调伏”:通过做到不追随而调伏。“善驱逐”:通过彻底远远地舍弃而调伏,而这样的状态就叫做“它所驱逐的”,所以这样说。“内行境”:行境成为内在的。因为业处所缘已经远离外在的色等所缘,所以称为“内”。“止的保护”:止是它的保护。正如根律仪戒成为止的保护那样,经中已经这样说了,这就是它的含义。正如根律仪戒是止的缘,同样地,止也是它的缘。巴利
Sudujitanti nibbisevanabhāvakaraṇena jitaṃ. Sutajjitanti suṭṭhu dūrakaraṇena jitaṃ, tathābhūtañca tajjitaṃ nāma hotīti tathā vuttaṃ. Gocarajjhattanti ajjhattabhūto gocaro. Kammaṭṭhānārammaṇañhi bahiddhārūpādiārammaṇavidhuratāya ajjhattanti vuccati. Samatho anurakkhaṇaṃ etassāti samathānurakkhaṇaṃ. Yathā indriyasaṃvarasīlaṃ samathānurakkhaṇaṃ hoti, tathā kathitanti attho. Yathā hi indriyasaṃvarasīlaṃ samathassa paccayo, evaṃ samathopi tassa paccayoti.
琵琶被弹奏的时候,声音让心染着,所以叫“染着”。因为它不肯放手,把心绑住,所以叫“系缚的”。缠缚的地方,就是琴弦附着缠绕的位置。“角”这个名称,是因为它从弯曲处发出琵琶的声音,所以把木棒叫做“角”,不管是用角还是别的什么材料做成的拨子。因此说“四方形的坚实小棒”。巴利
Vādiyamānāya vīṇāya. Cittaṃ rañjetīti rajjanena. Avissajjanīyatāya cittaṃ bandhatīti bandhanīyo. Veṭṭhaketi tantīnaṃ āsajjanaveṭṭhake. Koṇanti kavaṇato vīṇāya saddakaraṇato koṇanti laddhanāmaṃ dārudaṇḍaṃ siṅgādīsu yena kenaci kataṃ ghaṭikaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘caturassaṃ sāradaṇḍaka’’nti.
因为那位国王或大臣没有如实了知声音,为了显示他对声音不了知的那种状态,才说了“我将看见声音”等话。巴利
Yasmā so rājā rājamahāmatto vā saddaṃ yathāsabhāvato na aññāsi, tasmiṃ tassa ajānanākārameva dassetuṃ ‘‘saddaṃ passissāmī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
据说“asatī”这个词在巴利圣典里是因为词性颠倒才这么说的,所以论师按照它原本的词性说出来时,就说成“asā”。在说了“asatī是下贱的称呼”之后,为了说明它在那里是怎么用的,就说“世间的女人名叫asā”,意思是世间的女人就是不贞的,接着说明其中的原因:“她们没有界限。”在世间通常,兄长、弟弟、舅舅等这些界限和规矩,在她们那里是不存在的。为什么呢?因为她们爱染深重又放肆,会以交合的方式与所有人发生关系。怎么讲呢?就像“尸弃”一切通吃一样。因此他说——巴利
Asatī kirāyanti pāḷiyaṃ liṅgavipallāsena vuttanti yathāliṅgameva vadanto ‘‘asā’’ti āha. ‘‘Asatīti lāmakādhivacana’’nti vatvā tattha payogaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘asā lokitthiyo nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ, loke itthiyo nāma asatiyoti attho, tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘velā tāsaṃ na vijjatī’’ti. Pakatiyā loke jeṭṭhabhātā kaniṭṭhabhātā mātulotiādikā velā mariyādā tāsaṃ na vijjati. Kasmā? Sārattā ca pagabbā ca sabbesampi sambhogavasena viniyogaṃ gacchanti. Kathaṃ? Sikhī sabbaghaso yathā. Tenevāha –
一切河流都弯弯曲曲地流,一切树林都是木头组成的。
一切女人只要得到隐蔽的地方,都会做恶事。巴利
‘‘Sabbā nadī vaṅkagatī, sabbe kaṭṭhamayā vanā; Sabbitthiyo kare pāpaṃ, labhamāne nivātake’’ti. (jā. 2.21.308);
其他像弦乐器、方鼓等乐器也是如此。五蕴就像琵琶,因为它是许多法的集合体;瑜伽行者就像国王,因为他追寻与那相关的诸法。所谓“其”,指的就是瑜伽行者。巴利
Aññampi tantibaddhaṃ caturassaambaṇavāditādīni. Vīṇā viya pañcakkhandhā anekadhammasamūhabhāvato. Rājā viya yogāvacaro tappaṭibaddhadhammagavesakattā. Assāti yogāvacarassa.
“趣”这个词也用在除了地狱等以外的其他地方。为了把两者区分开来,就像说“苦苦”“色色”那样,说“趣趣”,意思就是被称为“趣”的流转之处。因此说:“在这中间轮回流转。”所谓“生趣”,就是产生之处本身就是趣。巴利
Nirayādito aññasmimpi gati-saddo vattati. Tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘gatigatī’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘dukkhadukkhaṃ, rūparūpa’’nti ca yathā, gatisaññitaṃ pavattiṭṭhānanti attho. Tenāha – ‘‘etthantare saṃsarati vattatī’’ti. Sañjāyanapadeso eva gatīti sañjātigati.
不过,为了通过可现见的母胎住处——这是让众生起悚惧的地方——来显示那个趣,才说了“此是其身”等话。对色法来说,它的自相就是趣的终点,这之后再也没有别的,所以叫“自相趣”。“非有”就是彻底的不存在。相续的断绝叫“非有趣”,因为它以非有为终点。“坏灭”就是刹那灭,这里同样是到达它的终点,所以是同一个说法。乃至有顶,就是乃至一切有的顶端。“自相趣”“非有趣”“坏灭趣”,因为已经用“此是同一理路”这句话说明了,所以没有再单独拿出来说。对那位漏尽者来说,这些趣不存在,因为它们已经被无上道彻底断除了。巴利
Taṃ pana gatiṃ sattānaṃ saṃvegavatthubhūtassa paccakkhassa gabbhāsayassa vasena dassetuṃ ‘‘ayamassa kāyo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rūpadhammassa salakkhaṇaṃ gati niṭṭhā, tato paraṃ aññaṃ kiñci natthīti salakkhaṇagati. Abhāvo accantābhāvo. Santānavicchedo vibhavagati taṃniṭṭhānabhāvā. Bhedoti khaṇanirodho, idhāpi taṃniṭṭhānatāyeva pariyāyo. Yāva bhavaggāti yāva sabbabhavaggā. Salakkhaṇavibhavagatibhedagatiyo ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti imināva pakāsitāti na gahitā. Tassa khīṇāsavassa na hoti aggamaggena samucchinnattā.
戒已经讲完,因为已经说了在色等所缘上防护欲等。中间讲了修定,因为经里说明“只向内住立……中略……入定”。最后讲了涅槃,因为经里说“凡他……中略……不存在”。巴利
Sīlaṃkathitaṃ rūpādīsu chandādinivāraṇassa kathitattā. Majjhe samādhibhāvanā kathitā ‘‘ajjhattameva santiṭṭhati…pe… samādhiyatī’’ti jotitattā. Pariyosāne ca nibbānaṃ kathitaṃ ‘‘yampissa…pe… na hotī’’ti vacanato.
第十 六种动物譬喻经的注解巴利
10. Chappāṇakopamasuttavaṇṇanā
247 “有疮的身体”就是指被创伤的身体。“煮熟的”是指因腐烂而熟透。在箭杆中,“箭”是通称,所以注释说“箭林就是箭杆林”。“身有疮……等等……应当知道”,这是说功德之身因为在下、中、上各部分有破裂、孔洞、戒行残缺等种种毁坏与不圆满的过失。这里所说的“草”是指“刺”,因为像刺一样;或者“草刺”这个说法,就是指草本身那种形态。巴利
247.Vaṇasarīroti vaṇitasarīro. Pakkattāti kuthitattā. Saradaṇḍesu sarasamaññāti kaṇḍa-saddo sarapariyāyoti āha – ‘‘saravananti kaṇḍavana’’nti. Arugatto…pe… veditabbo guṇasarīrassa khaṇḍachiddasīlādīhi heṭṭhā majjhe uparibhāge ca bhedavisamacchinnavikāradosattā. Ettha kusā ‘‘kaṇṭakā’’ti adhippetā kaṇṭakasadisattā, kusatiṇānaṃ eva vā vuttākārapadeso ‘‘kusakaṇṭako’’ti vutto.
就“刺穿”之义而言,指住在村里的人:成为不配受供养者后,以接受他们所作供养的方式,即以此压迫之义。巴利
Gāmavāsīnaṃ vijjhanaṭṭhenāti nārahova hutvā tesaṃ kārānaṃ paṭiggahaṇavasena pīḷanaṭṭhena.
Pakkhin 就是象相鸟。据说它的脸像象鼻,所以叫“象鼻鸟”。Vissajjeyya 的意思是:就像用绳子绑着那样,照原样放出去。巴利
Pakkhinti hatthiliṅgasakuṇaṃ. Tassa kira hatthisoṇḍasadisaṃ mukhaṃ, tasmā ‘‘hatthisoṇḍasakuṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Vissajjeyyāti rajjuyā yathābaddhaṃ eva vissajjeyya.
以盘绕:就是以自己的身体盘绕。结成圆环:就是让身体像圆环那样安住,这样做了之后。我将入睡:就是我要进入睡眠。想要飞起:就是想要腾空飞起。从此方到彼方:就是从一个方向到另一个方向。巴利
Bhogehīti attano sarīrabhogehi. Maṇḍalaṃ bandhitvāti yathā sarīraṃ maṇḍalākārena tiṭṭhati, evaṃ katvā. Supissāmīti niddaṃ okkamissāmi. Ḍetukāmoti uppatitukāmo. Disā disanti disato disaṃ.
六处就像六种动物,因为它们的志趣各不相同;而它们志趣的差异,应当理解为它们各自朝向不同境界的倾向。渴爱就像坚固的绳子,因为它把六处捆绑起来。无明就像中间的结,因为它是这个系缚难以解开的原因。所缘之所以变得强有力,既因为它令人愉悦可爱,也因为在它之上渴爱的执取非常牢固。巴利
Cha pāṇakā viya cha āyatanāni nānajjhāsayattā, nānajjhāsayatā ca nesaṃ nānāvisayaninnatāya daṭṭhabbā. Daḷharajju viya taṇhā tesaṃ bandhanato. Majjhe gaṇṭhi viya avijjā bandhanassa dubbinimmocanahetuto. Ārammaṇaṃ balavaṃ hoti manuññabhāvena ceva tattha taṇhābhinivesassa daḷhabhāvena ca.
如果是用相似的东西来打比方,那就属于“引喻”这一类。所谓“appanā”,就是结合、对照的意思。在经文里,正是用“evameva kho”(正是如此)这类说法来安立比喻的。眼之所以有不确定的欲求倾向,是因为它对色、心等(对象)有着不均衡的倾向。其余诸处也应当依照同样的道理来理解。巴利
Sarikkhakena vā upamāya āharaṇapakkhe. Appanāti saṃsandanā. Pāḷiyaṃyeva appitā upamā ‘‘evameva kho’’tiādinā. Rūpacittādivisamaninnattā cakkhussa visamajjhāsayatā. Esa nayo sesesupi.
在名为耳孔的孔洞中,即耳孔状的凹陷里。对于耳朵来说,它是缘,也就是亲依止缘,因为没有它就听不到声音。说了“即使是空无一物的虚空也可以”之后,为了说明它作为缘的性质,又说了“在洞穴内”等话。撞击界的相续,就是相互撞击诸界的相续。巴利
Kaṇṇacchiddakūpaketi kaṇṇacchiddasaññite āvāṭe. Tassāti sotassa. Paccayo hotīti upanissayo hoti tena vinā saddaggahaṇassa abhāvato. ‘‘Ajaṭākāsopi vaṭṭati evā’’ti vatvā tassa paccayabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘antoleṇasmi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Dhātuparamparā ghaṭṭentoti bhūtaparamparāsaṅghaṭṭento.
“若是如此”:当声音这样通过大种的相续传到耳中时,耳就有了“已到达行境”的性质。如果耳像鼻等那样执取已到达的对象,就不可能知道“远处有声音”,因为它只执取已到达的对象。意识有种种了知的方式,这是因为执取方式有差别。然而,耳识的生起在两种情况下都是一样的。即使声音停在远处,也能在那种地方成为回响等的缘,应当看作像铁的运动之于磁石那样。“法性”:就是法的自性,意思是这是声音的自性。能从各处听到,是因为获得了名为虚空的依止。不过,如果耳是执取已到达的对象,那么心生的声音就不能成为耳识的所缘缘。在《发趣论》中,虽然一般地说“声处以所缘缘为缘,而作为耳识的缘”,但外界并没有心生的声音。或者,心生的声音通过界的相续撞击耳净色,那个通过相续转起的,已经不是心生的声音了,因为它是时节生的。因此,声音在哪里生起,就只安住于那里而到达耳净色的领域,这是这里应当得出的结论。所以说“它确实是以未至为行境”。巴利
Evaṃ santeti evaṃ bhūtaparamparāvasena sadde sotapathamāgacchante. Sampattagocaratā hoti sotassa. Ghānādīnaṃ viya ‘‘dūre saddo’’ti jānanaṃ na sambhaveyya sampattagāhibhāvato. Tathā tathā jānanākāro hoti manoviññāṇassa gahaṇākāravisesato. Sotaviññāṇappavatti pana ubhayattha samānāva. Dūre ṭhitopi saddo tādise ṭhāne paṭighosādīnaṃ paccayo hoti ayokanto viya ayocalanassāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dhammatāti dhammasabhāvo, saddassa so sabhāvoti attho. Tato tato savanaṃ hoti ākāsasaññitassa upanissayassa labbhanato. Yadi pana sotaṃ sampattagāhī siyā, cittasamuṭṭhānasaddo sotaviññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayo na siyā. Paṭṭhāne ca avisesena ‘‘saddāyatanaṃ sotaviññāṇassa ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo’’ti vutto, bahiddhā ca cittajassa saddassa sambhavo natthi. Atha vā cittajo saddo dhātuparamparāya sotapasādaṃ ghaṭṭeti, na so cittajo saddo, yo paramparāya pavatto. Utujo hi so, tasmā yathuppanno saddo, tattha ṭhitova sotapasādassa āpāthaṃ āgacchatīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘asampattagocarameveta’’nti.
那时,因为没有危险,就达到了心一境性。鼻是依止于被称为鼻孔的虚空而运作的,所以说鼻以虚空为住处。没有风就不可能执取香,所以是以风为依止、以香为行境。因此说“确实如此”等。巴利
Tadā ekaggacittataṃ āpajjati parissayānaṃ abhāvato. Nāsacchiddasaṅkhātaākāsasannissaye vattanato ghānaṃ ākāsajjhāsayaṃ vuttaṃ. Vātena vinā gandhagahaṇassa asambhavato vātūpanissayagandhagocaraṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādi.
从村里得到的食物,就是“村”;因为心倾向于它,所以说“以村为所依”。同样,味是生命的标志,也就是生命;因为心倾向于它,所以它被称为“舌”。不可能用唾液知道未被浸湿的东西的味道,因此舌是以水为依托、以味为对象。巴利
Gāmato laddhabbaṃ āhāraṃ gāmaṃ, tanninnatāya gāmajjhāsayatā vuttā. Tathā hi jīvitanimittaṃ raso jīvitaṃ, tasmiṃ ninnatāya taṃ avhāyatīti jivhā. Na sakkā kheḷena atemitassa rasaṃ jānituṃ, tasmā āposannissitarasārammaṇā jivhāti.
从未烧的墓地之外。执受为倾向,就是倾向于执受。作为身净色所依的地界,只有当触所缘撞击时,识才在那里生起,不是别的情况,所以说以依地之触为所缘者。确实如此等,是证明身体以执受为倾向的。内或外,就是内的或外的。身的,指身体的。被善建立者等,是显示那地界作为缘的状态。巴利
Āmakasusānato bahi. Upādiṇṇakajjhāsayoti upādiṇṇakaninno. Kāyapasādasannissayabhūtāya pathaviyā phoṭṭhabbārammaṇe ghaṭite eva tattha viññāṇuppatti, na aññathāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pathavīsannissitaphoṭṭhabbārammaṇo’’ti. Tathā hītiādi kāyassa upādiṇṇakajjhāsayatāya sādhakaṃ . Ajjhattikabāhirāti ajjhattikā bāhirā vā. Assāti kāyassa. Susanthatassātiādi tassa pathaviyā paccayabhāvadassanaṃ.
种种倾向,就是倾向于种种所缘。这是为了显示心像猴子一样不稳定。因此说“即使以前见过的”等等。通过执取根本有分,排除了随后生起的有分。是意的,也就是心的。应当知道,这是唯作识。种种,就是差别。巴利
Nānajjhāsayoti nānārammaṇaninno. Tena manassa makkaṭassa viya anavaṭṭhitataṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhapubbepī’’tiādi. Mūlabhavaṅgaggahaṇena piṭṭhibhavaṅgaṃ nivatteti. Assāti manassa. Evaṃ kiriyamayaṃ viññāṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nānattanti bhedo.
就像那些因为防止心跟着自己的喜好转动而受到约束的人。没有贪染的状态,就是指没有那种被称为贪染的躁动。不牵引,是指在它自己的范围内、在色所缘上,既不牵引心的相续,也不牵引具有那颗心的人。这里说的只是前行观,因为经中是从处的角度这样教导的:诸比丘,你们应当这样学。巴利
Yathārucippavattiyā nivāraṇavasena baddhānaṃ. Nibbisevanabhāvanti lolatāsaṅkhātaparipphandassa abhāvaṃ. Nākaḍḍhatīti savisaye rūpārammaṇe cittasantānaṃ, taṃsamaṅginaṃ vā puggalaṃ nākaḍḍhati. Pubbabhāgavipassanāva kathitā āyatanamukhena ‘‘evañhi vo, bhikkhave, sikkhitabba’’nti vuttattā.
11. 《稻秆经》的注疏讲解巴利
11. Yavakalāpisuttavaṇṇanā
248 大麦堆,就是成熟大麦堆成的集合体。手持木杖的人,就是拿着棍棒的人。应当打谷,意思是:就像让叫作大麦的谷物从茎秆上脱落一样,应当这样打谷。让大麦脱落,是指从大麦穗那里通过打谷使大麦脱落、分离出来。巴利
248.Yavapuñjo suparipakkayavasamudāyo. Kājahatthāti daṇḍahatthā. Potheyyunti yathā yavasaṅkhātaṃ dhaññaṃ vaṇṭato muccati, evaṃ potheyyuṃ. Yave sāvetvāti yavasīsato yave pothanena mocetvā vivecetvā.
六处就像四通八达的大路口,因为它们是所缘之杖击打的地方。众生就像稻束,因为会被那些所缘击打。六种杖,就是按自性各自分为可意、不可意、中等三类,一共十八种所缘,它们击打处在稻束位置的众生。因为对存在的渴求而一再一再地再生,所以用复数来说“对存在的渴求是烦恼”。或者,这里的意思应该理解为:对存在的渴求,以及作为它条件的烦恼,合起来就是“对存在的渴求烦恼”。因为众生的一切轮回之苦都以对存在的渴求为根本,所以接着说“如此,众生”等等。“对存在的渴求烦恼”,就是以对存在的渴求为根本的烦恼。巴利
Catumahāpatho viya cha āyatanāni ārammaṇadaṇḍakehi hananaṭṭhānattā. Yavakalāpī viya satto tehi haññamānattā. Cha byābhaṅgiyo viya sabhāvato chadhāpi paccekaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhamajjhattavasena aṭṭhārasa ārammaṇāni yavakalāpaṭṭhāniyassa sattassa hananato. Bhavapatthanāya aparāparuppattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘bhavapatthanā kilesā’’ti bahuvacananiddeso. Bhavapatthanā ca tassa paccayabhūtā kilesā cāti bhavapatthanākilesāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yasmā sattānaṃ vaṭṭadukkhaṃ nāma sabbampi taṃ bhavapatthanāmūlakaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ sattā’’tiādi. Bhavapatthanakilesāti ca bhavapatthanāmūlakaṃ kilesaṃ.
处格是指近处的意思,所以用“处格”。因此说“在善法堂门前”。“没有做”是指没有造作苦。“像新粪猪一样”就是像吃新粪的猪那样。“只是以心”是说,被束缚的人只是以自己的心而被束缚。因此,就像毗摩质多罗的束缚被解开一样,所以说“毗摩质多罗束缚”。“智解脱的束缚”就是通过智慧而解脱的束缚。巴利
Bhummanti samīpatthe bhummaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sudhammāya dvāre’’ti. Na katanti dukkhuppādanaṃ na kataṃ. Navagūthasūkaraṃ viyāti navagūthabhakkhasūkaraṃ viya. Cittenevāti yo bajjhati, tassa citteneva . Tasmāti yasmā vepacittibandhanassa bandhanamuccanaṃ viya, tasmā ‘‘vepacittibandhana’’nti vuttaṃ. Ñāṇamokkhaṃ bandhananti ñāṇena muccanaṃ bandhanaṃ.
“妄想”是指:通过构想的爱执,想“这是我的”;通过见,想“这是我的我”;通过慢,想“我就是这个”,这样在妄想。因为脱离五蕴并没有一个可被妄想的对象,所以说“在诸蕴上妄想”。这里的“魔的”是属格形式。“被烦恼魔所缚”就是被烦恼魔、被那同样的烦恼束缚所绑住。“已解脱”在这里也是同样的道理。巴利
Maññamānoti parikappitataṇhāvasena ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’ti, diṭṭhivasena ‘‘eso me attā’’ti, mānavasena ‘‘esohamasmī’’ti maññanto. Khandhavinimuttassa maññamānavatthuno abhāvā ‘‘khandhe maññanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Etanti ‘‘mārassā’’ti etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Kilesamārena baddhoti kilesamārena teneva kilesabandhanena baddho. Muttoti etthāpi eseva nayo.
当爱妄想存在时,见妄想和慢妄想根本就不会有牵连,正如用“我是”这个词说出了见妄想和慢妄想一样,也用“我是”这个词说出了爱妄想。用“我是这个”这个词所说的见妄想,只是依据当下所得的见之对象来说的。用“我将是”来说的见妄想,是依据对未来见之对象的构想来说的。因为大多数对未来执取就是常见。即使是以断灭见的方式,那也只是见妄想。这样联系起来理解。“有色”等词,只是对常见所执本身的不同说明。因为妄想像疾病一样带来过患,像痈肿一样内部有隐患,像箭刺一样造成伤害,所以依这些爱等烦恼,以明显的动摇而动摇,以不明显的颤动而颤动。戏论应理解为在轮回中长久流转,或者说是蕴相续的扩展。达到放逸行相,达到昏昧行相。“它们的”是指那些爱、见等烦恼。“为显示行相”就是为了显示它们生起的行相。巴利
Taṇhāmaññanāya sati diṭṭhimānamaññanānaṃ pasaṅgo eva natthīti yathā ‘‘asmī’’ti padena diṭṭhimānamaññanā vuttā honti, evaṃ taṇhāmaññitāpīti vuttaṃ ‘‘asmīti padena taṇhāmaññitaṃ vutta’’nti. Ayamahamasmīti padena diṭṭhimaññitanti etarahi labbhamānadiṭṭhivatthuvaseneva. Bhavissanti anāgatadiṭṭhivatthuparikappanavaseneva diṭṭhimaññitaṃ. Yebhuyyena hi anāgatāliṅganā sassatadiṭṭhi. Ucchedavasena diṭṭhimaññitamevāti ānetvā sambandho. Rūpītiādīni padāni. Sassatassevāti sassatagāhasseva pabhedadīpanāni. Yasmā maññitaṃ ābādhavasena rogo, antodosavasena gaṇḍo, aṅganikantavasena sallaṃ, tasmā imehi taṇhādīhi kilesehi pākaṭacalanavasena iñjanti ceva, apākaṭasañcalanavasena phandanti ca. Papañcitaṃ saṃsāre cirāyanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, khandhasantānassa vā vitthāraṇaṃ. Pamattākārappattā mucchanākārappattā. Tesanti taṇhādiṭṭhikilesānaṃ. Ākāradassanatthanti pavattiākāradassanatthaṃ.
“慢”是指以“我更好”等心态表现出来的自负状态。为什么说“与渴爱相应的慢”呢?难道一切慢不都是与渴爱相应的吗?确实,因为存在不一致的情况,所以需要加限定词来区分。这是对的,不过渴爱有时是慢的缘,有时不是慢的缘,因此慢被称为不定。正如《发趣论》中说“以结法为缘,结法以因缘生起”,在这里把诸结按各自可得的关系连接起来展示其关联,说了“以欲贪结为缘,有慢结、无明结”,又说“以欲贪结为缘,有无明结”,说了“以慢结为缘,有有贪结、无明结”,又说“以有贪结为缘,有无明结”。在这里,通过欲贪结和有贪结,说明了慢的不定性。其中,针对强有力的渴爱,说了“与渴爱相应的慢”。因为与强有力的渴爱相应的慢,自身也变得强有力,以“我是”这种带有特殊自负的方式生起。巴利
Māno nāma ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā majjanākārappavatti. Taṇhāya sampayuttamānavasenāti kasmā vuttaṃ? Nanu sabbo māno taṇhāsampayutto? Sati hi byabhicāre visesanaṃ icchitabbanti. Saccametaṃ, taṇhā pana atthi mānassa paccayabhūtā, atthi mānassa appaccayabhūtā, yato māno aniyato vuccati. Tathā hi paṭṭhāne ‘‘saṃyojanaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca saṃyojano dhammo uppajjati hetupaccayā’’ti ettha saṃyojanāni saṃyojanehi yathālābhaṃ yojetvā dassitayojanāya ‘‘kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca mānasaṃyojanaṃ avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti vatvā ‘‘kāmarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti, ‘‘mānasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti ca vatvā ‘‘bhavarāgasaṃyojanaṃ paṭicca avijjāsaṃyojana’’nti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca kāmarāgabhavarāgasaṃyojanehi mānassa aniyatabhāvo pakāsito. Tattha yā taṇhā balavatī, taṃ sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘taṇhāya sampayuttamānavasenā’’ti. Balavataṇhāsampayutto hi māno sayampi balavā hutvā asmīti savisesaṃ majjanavasena pavattatīti.
依见之方式是指以慢为根本的见之方式。因为以“我胜”等而具多慢的人,在色等某一对象上生起“我即是此”的见时,由于慢还没有被断除,慢也会在那些地方就地生起。所以,这是针对以慢为根本的见而说“依‘我即是此’之见而说”。但问难者不了解这个意思,把不存在的相应义当成实有而诘问:“难道不是吗?”对方回答“是的,没有”,接受了这个意思之后,又以“然而,对于慢……”等来答复。其中的含义已经解释过了。巴利
Diṭṭhivasenāti mānamūlakadiṭṭhivasena. ‘‘Seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā hi bahulamānupetassa puggalassa rūpādīsu ekaṃ uddissa ayamahamasmīti diṭṭhiyā uppannāya mānassa appahīnattā mānopi tattha tattheva uppajjati. Iti mānamūlakaṃ diṭṭhiṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘ayamahamasmīti diṭṭhivasena vutta’’nti. Codako pana imamatthaṃ ajānanto anupalabbhamānameva sampayogatthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘nanu cā’’tiādinā codeti. Itaro ‘‘āma natthī’’ti tamatthaṃ sampaṭicchitvā ‘‘mānassa panā’’tiādinā parihāramāha. Tassattho vutto eva.